WCDMA RAN - Basic Features

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 211

Basic Features

WCDMA RAN

User Guide

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG


Copyright

© Ericsson AB 2017, 2020-2022. All rights reserved. No part of this document


may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the copyright
owner.

Disclaimer

The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to
continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall
have no liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this
document.

Trademark List

All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
These are shown in the document Trademark Information.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Contents

Contents

1 Introduction 1
1.1 Overview 1

2 Basic Features per Functional Area 12


2.1 Radio Network 12
2.2 HSDPA 30
2.3 Services and Radio Access Bearers 38
2.4 Enhanced Uplink 48
2.5 Transport Network 50
2.6 RAN Management 66
2.7 Licensing 82
2.8 FAJ 121 2636: System Improvements in WRAN W13 Release 83
2.9 FAJ 121 3638: System Improvements in WRAN W14 Release 90
2.10 FAJ 121 4083: System Improvements in WRAN W15 Release 96
2.11 FAJ 121 4410: System Improvements in WRAN W16 Release 107
2.12 FAJ 121 4602: System Improvements in WRAN W17 Release 117
2.13 FAJ 121 4836: System Improvements in WRAN W18 Release 131
2.14 FAJ 121 4944: System Improvements in WRAN W19 Release 151
2.15 FAJ 121 5146: System Improvements in WRAN W20 Release 188
2.16 FAJ 121 5273: System Improvements in WRAN W21 Release 201
2.17 FAJ 121 5414: System Improvements in WRAN W22 Release 205

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Introduction

1 Introduction

This document presents an overview of the WCDMA RAN basic features.

For information on additional functionality in WCDMA RAN, see Optional


Features.

1.1 Overview
Table 1 presents the list of basic features in the WCDMA RAN. "X" indicates that
the feature is supported. "N/A" indicates the feature is not supported.

Table 1 Basic Features List

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 101: Accessibility X X X
FAJ 121 102: Backup X X X
FAJ 121 103: Configuration Management X X X
FAJ 121 104: Fault Management X X X
FAJ 121 105: Performance Management X X X
FAJ 121 106: Product Inventory X X X
FAJ 121 107: Security Management X X X
FAJ 121 108: Software Management X X X
FAJ 121 110: Site LAN X X X
FAJ 121 111: Documentation X X X
FAJ 121 112: Emergency Call X X X
FAJ 121 113: SAI Based Positioning X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 114: Admission Control X X X
FAJ 121 116: Cell Update X X X
FAJ 121 117: Channel Switching, Downlink X X X
FAJ 121 118: Ciphering Mode Control X X X
FAJ 121 119: Congestion Control X X X

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 1


Basic Features

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 120: Connection Setup and Release X X X
FAJ 121 121: Downlink Power Allocation X X X
FAJ 121 122: Downlink Power Drift Prevention X X X
FAJ 121 123: Integrity Protection X X X
FAJ 121 124: Paging X X X
FAJ 121 125: Power Control X X X
FAJ 121 126: Radio Connection Supervision X X X
FAJ 121 127: Soft/ Softer Handover and Cell
Reselection X X X

FAJ 121 128: System Information Distribution X X X


FAJ 121 129: Transparent Message Transfer X X X
FAJ 121 131: ATM PVC/PVP Support X X N/A
FAJ 121 132: Dynamic AAL2 Connections X X N/A
FAJ 121 133: Permanent AAL5 Connections for
Control Plane Traffic X X N/A

FAJ 121 134: ATM on Fractional Transmission for


2G Transmission Sharing N/A X N/A

FAJ 121 135: Circuit Emulation over ATM for 2G


Transmission Sharing N/A X N/A

FAJ 121 136: Transport Redundancy X X X


FAJ 121 137: Network Synchronization X X X
FAJ 121 138: Node Synchronization X X X
FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB for AMR X
Speech X X

FAJ 121 147: Conversational RAB for 64 kbps


Multimedia X X X

FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps


Packet Data X X X

FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet Data RAB


Combination X X X

FAJ 121 154: GSM Handover and Cell Reselection X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 244: Positioning Service, Cell Accuracy X N/A N/A

2 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Introduction

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 364: RAN Topologies X X X
FAJ 121 368: ATM Interfaces in RAN X X N/A
FAJ 121 369: Inverse Multiplexing over ATM, IMA N/A X N/A
FAJ 121 405: Inter Frequency Handover and Cell
Reselection X X

FAJ 121 406: Directed Retry to GSM X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 407: UTRAN Registration Area Handling X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 408: Active Queue Management for the
Interactive RAB X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 409: Statistical Observability X X X


FAJ 121 413: Two times PS Interactive RAB X X
Combination X

FAJ 121 425: Max Bit Rate Capability for QoS


Profiling X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 435: Inter-Frequency Load Sharing X X X


FAJ 121 437: License Control N/A X X
FAJ 121 440: System Integrated GPS Network X
Synchronization N/A X

FAJ 121 514: Radio Environment Statistics X X X


FAJ 121 550: Service Differentiated Congestion
Handling X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 553: Speech and Two Simultaneous


Interactive RABs for Packet Data X X X

FAJ 121 734: ATM RAN Transport Aggregation N/A X N/A


FAJ 121 735: AAL2 Switching for Transport
Aggregation N/A X N/A

FAJ 121 737: RAN Transport Quality of Service


Separation X X X

FAJ 121 748: Emergency Call Re-Direct to GSM X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 754: Speech and 0 kbps Packet Data X X X
FAJ 121 757: Conversational RAB for 64 kbps
CS Multimedia and 8 kbps Packet Data RAB X X X
Combination
FAJ 121 799: Service Based Handover X N/A N/A

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 3


Basic Features

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 800: Core Network Hard Handover X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 801: HSDPA Mobility X X X
FAJ 121 836: Transmission Power Priority N/A X N/A
FAJ 121 845: Dynamic PS I/B RAB Establishment X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 860: HSDPA Mobility Phase 2 X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 902: Inter-Frequency Load Distribution X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 903: HSDPA 16QAM X X X
FAJ 121 904: HSDPA Proportional Fair
Scheduling X X X

FAJ 121 905: HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB X X X


FAJ 121 928: Multi-Band Support X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 940: AAL2 path with UBR X X N/A
FAJ 121 962: Robust Transport Configuration X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 963: DL Flow Control for PS interactive/
background on DCH N/A X X

FAJ 121 964: IP Interfaces in RAN N/A X X


FAJ 121 966: Configurable Transport Bearer QoS X N/A
Class N/A

FAJ 121 967: HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation N/A X X


FAJ 121 968: HSDPA Flexible Scheduler N/A X X
FAJ 121 969: HSDPA Code Multiplexing and HS-
SCCH Power Control N/A X X

FAJ 121 970: Enhanced Uplink Introduction X X X


FAJ 121 971: Support for MSC in Pool X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 972: Support for SGSN in Pool X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 973: SS7 over IP X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 976: IuPS User Plane Over IP X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 977: Flexible Initial Rate Selection, PS X
Interactive N/A N/A

FAJ 121 978: Channel Switching, Uplink X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 979: Throughput Based Downswitch X N/A N/A

4 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Introduction

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 980: Interactive RAB for up to 128 kbps,
Uplink X X X

FAJ 121 981: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps,


Uplink X X X

FAJ 121 985: Conversational RAB for Multimode


AMR Speech X X X

FAJ 121 988: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA


Interactive 64/HS RAB Combination X X X

FAJ 121 989: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA


Interactive up to 384/HS RAB Combination X X X

FAJ 121 1001: Recording Observability for


General Performance Event Handling X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1003: Configurable Priority of Neighbor


Cell Relations X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1004: HSDPA CQI Adjustment N/A X X


FAJ 121 1009: Delayed Activation of Capacity
Control N/A X X

FAJ 121 1012: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS


Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Downlink X X X

FAJ 121 1013: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS


Interactive RAB for up to 128 kbps Uplink X X X

FAJ 121 1022: Domain Specific Access Class


Barring X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1023: Enhanced Uplink Introduction


Package X X X

FAJ 121 1047: Improved Downlink Coverage X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 1051: License Control of Functionality X X X
FAJ 121 1058: Incremental Redundancy N/A X X
FAJ 121 1069: Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive
RAB Combination X X X

FAJ 121 1070: Multiple HSPA PS Interactive RAB


Combination X X X

FAJ 121 1071: Three Times PS Interactive RAB


Combination X X X

FAJ 121 1072: Three Times HSDPA PS


Interactive RAB Combination X X X

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 5


Basic Features

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 1075: Speech 12.2 kbps and Two Times
HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination X X X

FAJ 121 1086: IMA Bandwidth Adaptation N/A X N/A


FAJ 121 1089: Drifting RNC Observability X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1091: HSPA Max Bit Rate for QoS
Profiling X X X

FAJ 121 1093: Flexible Quality of Service and


Allocation/Retention Handling X X X

FAJ 121 1094: Traffic Handling Priority X X X


FAJ 121 1095: Fast Power Congestion Control X X X
FAJ 121 1096: Active TX Gain Calibration N/A X X
FAJ 121 1098: Iub Optimization X X N/A
FAJ 121 1103: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple PS
Interactive RAB Combination X X X

FAJ 121 1109: Ethernet Aggregation Switching N/A X N/A


FAJ 121 1111: EUL QoS Scheduler X X X
FAJ 121 1114: HSDPA and Enhanced Uplink
Service Indicator X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1115: HSDPA QoS Scheduler X X X


FAJ 121 1118: Iub over IP/Ethernet in RNC X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1119: IuCS User Traffic over IP X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1120: Iur User Traffic over IP X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1123: RBS Soft Lock X X X
FAJ 121 1124: SIB18 for Improved Inter PLMN X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1128: Transmit Diversity N/A X N/A
FAJ 121 1132: Iub over IP/Ethernet in RBS N/A X X
FAJ 121 1135: EUL Scheduler Enhancements N/A X X
FAJ 121 1154: Network Synch Server for IP
Transport X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1155: Network Synch Client for IP


Transport N/A X X

6 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Introduction

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 1156: Release Locked Mobiles when
IuCS is Down X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1158: Stand Alone SRB 3.4 kbps X X X


FAJ 121 1173: Support for AISG RET Antenna N/A X X
FAJ 121 1221: ATM and IP Dual Stack in RNC X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1226: Emergency Unlock X X X
FAJ 121 1242: Support for AISG and CWA TMAs N/A X X(1)
FAJ 121 1292: 3G Direct Tunnel X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1304: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple
HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination X X X

FAJ 121 1311: ATM and IP Dual Stack in RBS N/A X N/A
FAJ 121 1321: RNC Capacity License Control X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1327: Unified ATM/IP Admission Control
for Iub X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1328: Enhanced Layer 2 X X X


FAJ 121 1332: Load Triggered Access Class
Barring X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1333: Advanced Receivers, GRAKE in


RBS N/A X N/A

FAJ 121 1345: Downlink Power Control for EUL X X X


FAJ 121 1349: Initial UE Access Load Regulation X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1357: Configurable Carrier Bandwidth N/A X X
FAJ 121 1358: Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation N/A X X
FAJ 121 1369: RBS Auto Provisioning N/A X X
FAJ 121 1376: EUL Cell Edge Coverage X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1402: Inter-Frequency Load Based
Handover X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1408: Mub Port Integration N/A X N/A


FAJ 121 1440: GAN Mobility X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1442: RANAP Overload Control X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1443: EUL Single HARQ Process
Scheduling N/A X X

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 7


Basic Features

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 1459: Support for RRU in Cascaded
Configuration N/A X X

FAJ 121 1461: Common Iub IP Host in RBS N/A X X


FAJ 121 1462: Cascading of AISG RET Antenna N/A X X
FAJ 121 1463: Robust Reconfiguration Using
Rollback N/A X N/A

FAJ 121 1468: Non-HSPA Inter-Frequency Load


Sharing X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1473: Faster Activation Time X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 1480: Common Iub IP Host in RNC X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 1486: WCDMA RAN Load Expert X X N/A
FAJ 121 1488: Dual TMA Support N/A X N/A
FAJ 121 1500: Support for High Capacity MSC in
Pool X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1501: RNC Adaptive UE Allocation on


Special Processor (SP) X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1505: Core Network Supervision X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 1513: Increased HSDPA Code Capacity
on HS-TX N/A X N/A

FAJ 121 1519: Multistandard Node N/A X X


FAJ 121 1554: Absolute Time Synch N/A X N/A
FAJ 121 1599: SRB on HS TN Resource Booking
Optimization X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1636: Flexible Intra Frequency


Measurement Initiation X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 1831: Delayed Activation of Capacity


Control RNC X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 2576: Cross-Sector Antenna Sharing


Redundancy N/A X N/A

FAJ 121 2710: MultiRAB Observability X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 3247: Mub Routing in EvoC 8200/RNC X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 3522: IP Optimized HSDPA TN Settings N/A X X
FAJ 121 3652: Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection X N/A N/A

8 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Introduction

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 3661: Multi-Standard Traffic
Management - GSM X X X

FAJ 121 3662: RAN Services X X X


FAJ 121 3663: Radio Network Efficiency (2)
X X X
FAJ 121 3664: HSPA Performance(3) X X X
FAJ 121 3665: IP Transport(4) X X X
FAJ 121 3955: IP Static Routing in RNC X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 4035: GSM or Inter-Frequency Handover
Based on Permission Configuration X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 4160: Multi-Setor Per Radio N/A X(5) X


FAJ 121 4243: Virtual Routers X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 4255: Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection N/A N/A X

FAJ 121 4257: Virtual Routers N/A N/A X


FAJ 121 4278: Manual Control of RNC Iub Link
Allocation X N/A N/A

FAJ 121 4328: CMPv2 N/A X X


FAJ 121 4331: CPRI Link Observability N/A X X
FAJ 121 4376: Access Control Lists N/A X X
FAJ 121 4411: IP Loopback Interface N/A N/A X
FAJ 121 4412: Static Routing N/A N/A X
FAJ 121 4413: Ethernet Switching N/A N/A X
FAJ 121 4414: Bridged Virtual Interface N/A N/A X
FAJ 121 4418: Signed Software X(6) X X
FAJ 121 4550: Port Mirroring N/A N/A X
FAJ 121 4563: Synchronous Ethernet for EvoC X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 4579: Energy Metering N/A X X
FAJ 121 4764: Optimized Antenna Selection N/A N/A X
FAJ 121 4773: Access Control List in RNC X N/A N/A
FAJ 121 4776: Mixed Mode Baseband R503 N/A N/A X

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 9


Basic Features

Baseba
DU
nd
Feature RNC Radio
Radio
Node
Node
FAJ 121 4799: Simplified Radio Hardware
Conformance Testing N/A X X

FAJ 121 4874: Anonymized Event Data X N/A N/A


FAJ 121 5297: Site Diagnostics N/A N/A X
FAJ 121 5381: 4TX Support for One WCDMA
Carrier N/A N/A X

FAJ 121 2636: System Improvements in WRAN


W13 Release(7) X X X

FAJ 121 3638 : System Improvements in WRAN


W14 Release(8) X X X

FAJ 121 4083 : System Improvements in WRAN


W15 Release(9) X X X

FAJ 121 4410: System Improvements in WRAN


W16 Release(10) X X X

FAJ 121 4602: System Improvements in WRAN X


W17A Release(11) X X

FAJ 121 4791: WCDMA Flexible Node N/A


Supervision X N/A

FAJ 121 4836: System Improvements in WRAN


W18 Release(12) X X X

FAJ 121 4941: Support for AISG RAE N/A N/A X


FAJ 121 4944: System Improvements in WRAN
W19 Release(13) X X X

FAJ 121 5146: System Improvements in WRAN


W20 Release(14) X X X

FAJ 121 5281: Multiple IP Addresses on the


Same VLAN N/A N/A X

FAJ 121 5338: Efficient Fault Management N/A N/A X


FAJ 121 5339: In-Service Performance
Excellence N/A N/A X

FAJ 121 5273: System Improvements in WRAN


W21 Release(15) X X X

FAJ 121 5330: Support for AISG ADB N/A N/A X


(1) Partly supported by Baseband Radio Node.
(2) This feature is a bundle of features, see FAJ 121 3663: Radio Network Efficiency on page 27.
The feature support in the nodes depends on each feature.

10 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Introduction

(3) This feature is a bundle of features, see FAJ 121 3664: HSPA Performance on page 36. The
feature support in the nodes depends on each feature.
(4) This feature is a bundle of features, see FAJ 121 3665: IP Transport on page 61. The feature
support in the nodes depends on each feature.
(5) This feature is a license controlled feature for DU Radio Node.
(6) Only supported on Evo Controller 8200/RNC
(7) For more details on the supported nodes, see FAJ 121 2636: System Improvements in WRAN
W13 Release on page 83.
(8) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 3638: System Improvements in WRAN
W14 Release on page 90.
(9) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 4083: System Improvements in WRAN
W15 Release on page 96.
(10) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 4410: System Improvements in WRAN
W16 Release on page 107.
(11) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 4602: System Improvements in WRAN
W17 Release on page 117.
(12) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 4836: System Improvements in WRAN
W18 Release on page 131.
(13) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 4944: System Improvements in WRAN
W19 Release on page 151.
(14) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 5146: System Improvements in WRAN
W20 Release on page 188.
(15) For more details on the supported node, see FAJ 121 5273: System Improvements in WRAN
W21 Release on page 201.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 11


Basic Features

2 Basic Features per Functional Area

The WCDMA RAN basic features are grouped into functional areas
described in the following sections.

2.1 Radio Network


This section describes basic features in Radio Network functionality.

2.1.1 FAJ 121 112: Emergency Call


The Emergency Call feature supports emergency calls within the WCDMA RAN.
The feature also enables emergency call setup in congested WCDMA cells, where
normal voice calls are rejected.

2.1.2 FAJ 121 113: SAI Based Positioning


The Service Area Identifier (SAI) Based Positioning feature allows to position
UE with the accuracy down to cell level with the use of SAI. The positioning
information is available on the Iu interface.

2.1.3 FAJ 121 114: Admission Control


The Admission Control feature allows new incoming calls, as well as incoming
Handover (HO) attempts, when different load measures in the cell are lower
than predefined thresholds. At the high load, an enhanced soft congestion
functionality is supported where, for instance, a voice call is admitted by lowering
the bit rate of a packet user, or by pre-empting a user service with a lower priority
than the voice call. Admission control is applied in the system on cell level in
both Uplink (UL) and Downlink (DL), and reduces dropped call rate and increases
accessibility.

For more information, refer to Capacity Management.

2.1.4 FAJ 121 116: Cell Update


Using Common or Paging channels is important to allow an efficient
management of resources for always connected low-intensity packet traffic. The
Cell Update feature is used to allow mobility, cell reselection (Hard HO) and
efficient paging of UE in such states.

For more information, refer to Idle Mode and Common Channel Behavior.

12 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.1.5 FAJ 121 117: Channel Switching, Downlink


Interactive or background packet data services, for instance Web browsing and
sending emails, typically generate bursty traffic with varying bandwidth demand.
Static allocation of resources is inefficient. The Channel Switching feature allows
the optimization of available resources by switching the UE between different
channel types or different bit rates, depending on user activity and resource
availability. When user activity is low, the UE is switched from a Dedicated
Channel (DCH) to a Common Channel (CCH) so that the dedicated radio
resources are available to other users. Also, depending on throughput, coverage,
and resource availability, the user can be switched from a DCH to another one
with higher or a lower bit rate.

The Channel Switching feature is valid for the Interactive PS RAB and some
of the channels switching transitions occur only if the optional features for
relevant RAB combinations, rates or RAB states are installed. Also, some of the
transitions depend on other optional RAN features, that is, when an additional
RAN functionality is needed to execute the transition triggered by the channel
switching, for instance one of the following:

— FAJ 121 860: HSDPA Mobility phase 2

— FAJ 121 1002: Enhanced UL Mobility

For general information about channel switching, refer to Channel Switching.

2.1.6 FAJ 121 118: Ciphering Mode Control


The Ciphering Mode Control function handles the control of ciphering of user
plane and control plane data and coordinates the ciphering keys between
different CNs (PS and CS). The function is activated from the CN and
implemented in accordance with 3GPP Release 99 using the KASUMI algorithm
with 128-bit keys. The ciphering is performed for secure data confidentiality
between the Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) and UE.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.1.7 FAJ 121 119: Congestion Control


The Congestion Control feature is used to resolve overload. When the overload
occurs, the bit rates of the existing delay tolerant connections are reduced, or the
existing RABs are terminated in a predefined service-priority order.

For more information, refer to Capacity Management.

2.1.8 FAJ 121 120: Connection Setup and Release


The Connection Setup and Release feature includes establishment and release of
control plane connections between the UE and UTRAN, and between the UE and

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 13


Basic Features

the CNs. The feature also covers RAB establishment between a CN and the UE
with an established signalling connection, as well as release of existing RABs.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.1.9 FAJ 121 121: Downlink Power Allocation


This function enables setting the output power of the DL Common Control
Channels (CCCHs), as well as setting different maximum output power values
for the DL Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCHs). Since the DL output power
defines the coverage for individual channels, the system can be designed in such
a way that the DL data rate is higher than the UL data rate for users on the cell
border.

For more information, refer to Power Control.

2.1.10 FAJ 121 122: Downlink Power Drift Prevention


During the Soft HO (SHO), the output power rates from the different Nodes B can
drift apart. This feature offers a modified type of power control during the SHO
periods to prevent the drift.

For more information, refer to Power Control.

2.1.11 FAJ 121 123: Integrity Protection


The Integrity Protection feature controls the integrity protection of control plane
data and coordinates the integrity keys between different CNs (PS and CS).
The function is activated from the CN and implemented in accordance with
3GPP Release 99 using the KASUMI algorithm with 128-bit key. The integrity
protection maintains access link data integrity between the SRNC and UE.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.1.12 FAJ 121 124: Paging


The Paging feature enables the CN to page UE units for termination service
request or for the UTRAN to reach the UE to trigger the UE state transition. The
function also sends notification that the system information is modified.

For more information, refer to Idle Mode and Common Channel Behavior.

2.1.13 FAJ 121 125: Power Control


The Power Control is one of the most important features in a WCDMA network.
The purpose of the feature is to minimize output power while maintaining the
quality of Radio Links (RLs). Ericsson products support three different types of

14 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

power control: inner loop power control, outer loop power control, and open loop
power control.

For more information, refer to Power Control.

2.1.14 FAJ 121 126: Radio Connection Supervision


The Radio Connection Supervision feature ensures a timely release of system
resources reserved to UE units no longer accessible because of poor radio
connection quality or the lost contact, or both. The feature also informs the CN
about lost connections.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.1.15 FAJ 121 127: Soft/ Softer Handover and Cell Reselection
Soft or Softer HO for UE on DCH, and cell reselection for UE on CCH and in Idle
Mode, enable the UE to maintain continuity and quality of the connection while
moving between cells. In Soft or Softer HO mode, UE communicates with two or
more cells simultaneously. The SHO occurs when the UE communicates with two
or more Nodes B, while the Softer HO occurs when the UE communicates with
multiple sectors of the same Node B.

Also, SHO and cell reselection between cells from different RNCs, using the Iur
interface, is supported.

For more information, refer to Handover.

2.1.16 FAJ 121 128: System Information Distribution


The purpose of the System Information Distribution feature is to inform UE of the
content of the system information and updates to the system information within
the coverage area of an RNC.

For more information, refer to Idle Mode and Common Channel Behavior.

2.1.17 FAJ 121 129: Transparent Message Transfer


The Transparent Message Transfer feature supports the transfer of signalling and
other messages between the UE and the CN nodes, Mobile Services Switching
Center (MSC) and Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN).

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 15


Basic Features

2.1.18 FAJ 121 154: GSM Handover and Cell Reselection


The feature GSM Handover and Cell Reselection provides support for Inter Radio
Access Technology Handover (IRATHO), cell change, and cell reselection for
interoperability with GSM. CS or PS, or both call types can be transferred to and
from GSM networks without loss of context. This feature provides the required
functions on the WCDMA side, while the feature FAJ 121 57: GSM - WCDMA Cell
Reselection and Handover in GSM BSS R9.1 provides the corresponding functions
on the GSM/BSS side.

This feature requires support in both the CN and the GSM BSS.

For more information about IRATHO, refer to Handover.

2.1.19 FAJ 121 405: Inter Frequency Handover and Cell Reselection
The Inter-Frequency Handover (IFHO) allows an ongoing call to be transferred
from one WCDMA frequency to another when UE is moving out of coverage of
the source frequency. The feature covers functions for both IFHO for UE on DCH
and for inter-frequency cell reselection in Connected Mode on CCH and in Idle
Mode.

For more information, refer to Handover.

2.1.20 FAJ 121 406: Directed Retry to GSM


The feature enables speech users in a WCDMA network to be redirected to
GSM at a call setup, in case the load in the WCDMA cell exceeds an operator-
configured threshold.

For more information, refer to Load Sharing.

2.1.21 FAJ 121 407: UTRAN Registration Area Handling


With the feature UTRAN Registration Area Handling, the use of UTRAN
Registration Area (URA) is introduced and it is supported to have the UE in
URA_PCH state. A URA is an area consisting of one or a number of cells. The
URA_PCH state is applicable for the packet interactive/background RAB. For
the UE in URA_PCH state, the service reactivation time is shorter compared to
setting up the connection from Idle Mode. At the same time, the UE requires less
signalling and power consumption when in URA_PCH state compared to when
on the common CELL_FACH channel. Hence, keeping the UE in URA_PCH state
for a long time is possible, to let the end user benefit from the short service
reactivation time.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

16 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.1.22 FAJ 121 408: Active Queue Management for the Interactive RAB
The Active Queue Management (Active Queue Management) for Interactive RAB
feature introduces an optimized buffer handling, which minimizes the buffering
delays and interacts with the TCP in a favorable manner. The quality of the
service experienced by the end user is improved.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 148: Interactive Packet
RABs for up to 384 kbps Packet Data.

For more information, refer to Channel Switching.

2.1.23 FAJ 121 435: Inter-Frequency Load Sharing


The feature enables the system to actively evaluate the load conditions at
connection establishment, and if relevant, guide the UE to a less congested
frequency. The feature enables targeting Speech + PS Interactive 0/0 calls for
HO.

For more information, refer to Load Sharing.

2.1.24 FAJ 121 550: Service Differentiated Congestion Handling


Congestion control is used to resolve radio overload in a cell. The system stability
and service quality is then kept or DL air interface resources are balanced
between R99 and HSDPA users. In some cases the only way to resolve the
overload is to downswitch a number of packet users to a CCH or to release a
number of CS RABs. The configuration of the speed and number of connections
the system operates on when congestion occurs is possible. With the feature
Service Differentiated Congestion Handling, this configuration is also possible
separately for the guaranteed users and non-guaranteed users in the system.

For more information, refer to Capacity Management.

2.1.25 FAJ 121 748: Emergency Call Re-Direct to GSM


The feature Emergency Call Re-Direct to GSM provides support for both IRAT
redirect or HO, or both, of an emergency call from WCDMA 1900 MHz to GSM 800
MHz or 1900 MHz.

Support is required in both the CN and the GSM BSS. The feature requires the
basic Emergency Call feature, FAJ 121 112.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 17


Basic Features

2.1.26 FAJ 121 799: Service Based Handover


The Service Based Handover feature enables operators to restrict or promote
inter-system HOs and cell change. The WCDMA RAN is able to read and act on
the Service Indicator (SI) as set by the CN. The SI is supported for voice only.

The feature enables targeting Speech + PS Interactive 0/0 calls for HO.

For more information about IRATHO, refer to Handover.

2.1.27 FAJ 121 800: Core Network Hard Handover


CNHHO supports both Intra-frequency and Inter-frequency Hard Handover to a
cell in another RNS (different from the SRNS and the DRNS) towards which the
SRNC does not have any Iur connectivity, when the UE is using either circuit
switched services, packet switched services, or both services. Any active packet
switched services or simultaneous circuit switched and packet switched services
are handled by the complementary feature Core Network Hard Handover for PS.

Dynamic Relocation enables CNHHO to be triggered even when the Iur interface
is used between two RNSs. This process is meant for multi-vendor setups, where
it is beneficial to hand over the control of the connection to the DRNS once the
UE has moved far into the DRNS coverage area.

RELATED INFORMATION

Core Network Hard Handover

2.1.28 FAJ 121 845: Dynamic PS I/B RAB Establishment


This feature allows the operator to configure the PS Interactive/Background RAB
establishment procedure to use the Common or the Dedicated Channel. Also, the
configuration of a dynamic behavior of the establishment procedure is possible
and then the procedure is load-dependent. At low load the PS RAB is established
on a DCH, which minimizes the access time, for instance at data download.
During high load, the PS RAB is established on the Common Channels instead, so
the risk that the user is denied service, is reduced.

This feature requires FAJ 121 148: R2 Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps packet
data installed.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.1.29 FAJ 121 902: Inter-Frequency Load Distribution


The feature enables the system to distribute the traffic load unevenly between
WCDMA carriers.

18 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

This feature requires the feature FAJ 121 435: Inter-Frequency Load Sharing.

For more information, refer to Load Sharing.

2.1.30 FAJ 121 928: Multi-Band Support


The feature enables the system to support multiple frequency bands. This means
that the same mobility is supported between frequency bands as between
frequencies belonging to the same frequency band, with the only limitations
being those imposed by the capabilities of the UE.

The feature provides general support for all frequency bands up to Band XIV, as
defined in 3GPP.

For more information, refer to Multiband Operation.

2.1.31 FAJ 121 971: Support for MSC in Pool


The feature allows creating a pool of MSCs that can be used as a common
resource for serving an area. Within the area, a Mobile Station (MS) can roam
without the need to change the serving MSC node. The traffic can be spread
among the different MSCs in the pool, based on parameter settings.

For other information, including activation and deactivation, see Iu Flex.

2.1.32 FAJ 121 972: Support for SGSN in Pool


The feature allows creating a pool of SGSNs that can be used as a common
resource for serving an area within which an MS can roam without the need to
change the serving SGSN node. The traffic can be spread among the different
SGSNs in the pool, based on parameter settings.

For other information, including activation and deactivation, see Iu Flex.

2.1.33 FAJ 121 978: Channel Switching, Uplink


Interactive or background packet data services are typically bursty and consist
of traffic with varying bandwidth demand. Static allocation of resources
is inefficient. The Channel Switching Uplink feature allows optimization of
available UL resources by switching the user to a channel with a higher bit rate
when the user activity on the UL increases.

The Channel Switching, Uplink feature depends on other optional features for
its full or partial functionality. Channel switching is valid for the Interactive PS
RAB and some of the channel switching transitions that occur only if the optional
features for relevant RAB combinations, rates, or RAB states are installed. Also,
some of the transitions depend on other optional RAN features and additional

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 19


Basic Features

RAN functions are needed to execute the transition triggered by the channel
switching, for instance the following:

— FAJ 121 860: HSDPA Mobility Phase

— FAJ 121 1002: Enhanced UL Mobility

For more information, refer to Channel Switching.

2.1.34 FAJ 121 979: Throughput Based Downswitch


The Throughput Based Downswitch feature optimizes the use of the RAN
resources for the packet interactive RABs. The RAN system monitors the
throughput and if the user or application, or both reduce the data rate, a
downswitch to Radio Bearer (RB) with a lower rate occurs, if the lower rate
is sufficient to satisfy the user needs. The function applies to the UL and DL,
independently. The throughput-based downswitch leads to a more efficient use
of the radio network so that the investment in the radio network to provide
sufficient capacity can be reduced.

For more information, refer to Channel Switching.

2.1.35 FAJ 121 1022: Domain Specific Access Class Barring


The feature enables the operator to prevent users of a specific Access Class (AC)
from accessing either the CSCN or the PSCN, or both.

For more information, refer to Network Robustness and Network Load


Regulation.

2.1.36 FAJ 121 1047: Improved Downlink Coverage


The Improved Downlink Coverage feature allows UE to access the system down
to a coverage level of -119 dBm, compared to previous -115 dBm, with the
benefits of increased accessibility, improved indoor coverage, and site reduction.

This feature requires 3GPP Release 5 UE or later. The feature is licensed and
requires activation.

2.1.37 FAJ 121 1093: Flexible Quality of Service and Allocation/Retention


Handling
This feature introduces flexible handling of the user and service priority in the
WCDMA RAN. This feature allows to flexibly configure the priority of different
users and different services, for gold, silver, and bronze subscriptions. For
instance, the prioritized users or services can be enabled to get better access to
the system, by pre-empting other low-priority users or services, or when overload
occurs, by targeting other users or services first in the actions to reduce the load.

20 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

The feature provides increased benefit when combined with the following
features:

— FAJ 121 1111: EUL QoS Scheduler

— FAJ 121 1115: HSDPA QoS Scheduler

— FAJ 121 966: Configurable Transport Bearer QoS Class

For more information, refer to QoS Handling.

2.1.38 FAJ 121 1094: Traffic Handling Priority


This feature sets different priorities for interactive packet data as well as gives a
separate priority for interactive data with signalling indication.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 1115: HSDPA QoS Scheduler if THP is used for HSDPA.

— FAJ 121 1111: EUL QoS Scheduler if THP is used for the EUL.

For more information, refer to QoS Handling.

2.1.39 FAJ 121 1095: Fast Power Congestion Control


The Fast Congestion Control (FCC) is a feature that guarantees that RF output
power never exceeds the capability of the Multicarrier Power Amplifier (MCPA
HW). This capability is essential in WCDMA where each carrier supports many
users with fast power control.

For more information, refer to Capacity Management.

2.1.40 FAJ 121 1096: Active TX Gain Calibration


The TX Gain Calibration (TXGC) is a feature that increases the RF output power
accuracy from the WCDMA Nodes B.

2.1.41 FAJ 121 1124: SIB18 for Improved Inter PLMN


The feature improves the Inter PLMN IRAT performance for UE when many IRAT
neighbor cells are not applicable for specific UE units. By introducing SIB18 in
system broadcast the UE recognizes if a GSM cell is allowed or not, and thus does
not have to wait until registration is performed in this cell.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 154: GSM Handover and
Cell Reselection.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 21


Basic Features

For more information, refer to Idle Mode and Common Channel Behavior.

2.1.42 FAJ 121 1128: Transmit Diversity


This feature improves the DL RL performance in favorable radio conditions. It is
applied to CCHs, DCHs and Shared Channels improving DL bit rates and capacity.

The Transmit Diversity feature is not supported on the following HW:

— DUW 41

— DUW 31

— DUW 11

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.1.43 FAJ 121 1328: Enhanced Layer 2

The Enhanced Layer 2 feature allows higher bit rates.

This feature provides two enhancements to Layer 2 (L2). One is the Radio Link
Control (RLC) and Medium Access Control (MAC) that are introduced in 3GPP
Rel-7, and the second is flexible RLC and enhanced MAC-hs. The main benefit
is that higher bit rates can be efficiently supported. The feature requires the
optional feature FAJ 121 842: HSDPA to be installed.

For more information about Layer 2 dependencies, see HSDPA User Plane.

2.1.44 FAJ 121 1332: Load Triggered Access Class Barring


The Load Triggered Access Class Barring feature provides the possibility to avoid
the Iu signalling congestion toward the CN. The reduction is triggered by high Iu
signalling load and the signalling is regulated using Access Class Barring (ACB).

The feature provides optional load-dependent RNS-wide ACB that is applicable


only for ACs [0; 9]. Load is defined as the setup rate of Iu signalling connections
aggregated over all Iu links.

For more information, refer to Network Robustness and Network Load


Regulation.

2.1.45 FAJ 121 1349: Initial UE Access Load Regulation


This feature introduces the possibility to control the number of initial Iu accesses
for each time interval (a second) toward the CN to avoid overloading the CN with
Initial UE messages after RNC restart or upgrade.

22 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For other information, including activation and deactivation, refer to Network


Robustness and Network Load Regulation.

2.1.46 FAJ 121 1357: Configurable Carrier Bandwidth


This feature enables a bandwidth lower than 5 MHz. By configuring a lower
bandwidth for WCDMA, the operator can keep some GSM channels on both sides
of the WCDMA channel. The introduction of WCDMA is therefore smooth, and the
operator can still benefit from the GSM voice channels.

2.1.47 FAJ 121 1358: Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation

The purpose of the Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation feature is to increase


the peak bit rate in good radio conditions.

In the cases where the number of supported HS-PDSCH codes, modulation, or


UE capability limits the user throughput, this feature makes more efficient use
of the power available for the HSDPA connection by decreasing the resulting
Block Error Rate (BLER) for the scheduled HSDPA connection. The remaining
HS-PDSCH power when the TFRC selection algorithm is completed for all users
in a TTI is considered to be abundant HS-PDSCH power. This means that if a
sufficient amount of abundant HS-PDSCH power is available, the block error rate
can be reduced to 0%. Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation is always active in a
Baseband Radio Node.

2.1.48 FAJ 121 1376: EUL Cell Edge Coverage


The EUL Cell Edge Coverage feature improves the coverage of EUL connections
in existing networks. The feature covers the function introduced with feature
Improved EUL Power Control at UE Power Limitation in 3GPP release 8.

Cell edge coverage is improved for 2 ms and 10 ms Transmission Time Interval


(TTI) by enabling minimum UL throughput for a wider range.

For more information, refer to Power Control.

2.1.49 FAJ 121 1402: Inter-Frequency Load Based Handover


The Inter-Frequency Load Based Handover (IF LBHO) feature provides the
possibility to move speech users to another WCDMA frequency when the load
in the current cell is at admission level or higher. If admission control detects high
load when evaluating an admission request in a cell, then IF LBHO for speech
users is triggered.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 405: Inter-Frequency
Handover and Cell Reselection. If no Iur is deployed, the optional RAN feature
FAJ 121 800: Core Network Hard Handover is required.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 23


Basic Features

If the FAJ 121 1340: Soft Congestion Based on Iub, is active, an LBHO can be
performed in Iub congestion cases.

The feature enables targeting Speech + PS Interactive 0/0 calls for HO.

For more information, refer to Load Sharing.

2.1.50 FAJ 121 1440: GAN Mobility


The Generic Access Network (GAN) is a concept that provides access to the
legacy GSM/GPRS services over unlicensed radio using IP connectivity, such as
Bluetooth or Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), in IEEE 802.11. GAN is a
complementing access solution to the existing mobile access networks GSM RAN
and WCDMA RAN.

The GAN Mobility feature gives the possibility to move connections from UTRAN
into a GAN.

To support incoming GAN HO or cell change, this feature requires the optional
RAN feature FAJ 121 154: GSM Handover and Cell Reselection to be active.

2.1.51 FAJ 121 1442: RANAP Overload Control


This feature provides a method to maintain high system throughput, that is a
high rate of successful calls, during the overload in the CN.

The RANAP Overload Control feature reduces the signalling load toward an
overloaded CN node by selective dropping of the requests from the UE. The
selection criteria use the establishment cause sent in the UE request.

For more information, including activation and deactivation instructions, refer to


Network Robustness and Network Load Regulation.

2.1.52 FAJ 121 1443: EUL Single HARQ Process Scheduling

The EUL Single HARQ Process Scheduling feature lowers latency for more
users, and increases the cell capacity with many 2 ms TTI users.

This feature provides a lower minimum rate for EUL 2 ms TTI users through the
use of single Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) process scheduling. This
allows having more simultaneous 2 ms TTI users, higher EUL cell throughput and
improves the latency for 2ms TTI users.

For more information, see WCDMA Uplink.

24 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.1.53 FAJ 121 1459: Support for RRU in Cascaded Configuration


This feature introduces the support for Main Remote radio node configurations
with cascaded remote radio units. Up to six remote radio units can be cascaded
on one Optical Baseband Interface (OBIF) port. If Baseband R503 is connected
to OBIF, up to 16 units can be cascaded.

2.1.54 FAJ 121 1468: Non-HSPA Inter-Frequency Load Sharing


This feature enables the Rel99 DCH load to be divided between several carriers,
based on operator configurations. With this feature, prioritizing carriers for HS
users is possible. The DCH load is measured as DL power use and DL code tree
use, where DL power takes preference. This feature is triggered when the first
RAB is set up or upon transition from FACH to DCH when the second RAB is set
up.

This feature includes the following improvements:

— Recalculation of margin parameters UtranCell::dchIflsMarginPower and


UtranCell::dchIflsMarginCode in congested situations.

— More coverage relations, up to eight, and path loss threshold for each
relation.

— The introduction of an Ec/No threshold for IFLS features triggered from the
FACH/URA state.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 405: Inter Frequency
Handover and Cell Reselection.

For more information, refer to Load Sharing.

2.1.55 FAJ 121 1473: Faster Activation Time


This feature enables optimizing the activation time of the radio configuration
on a radio connection, for different reconfiguration cases (channel switching,
RAB establishment, or start and stop of Compressed Mode). The operator can
influence the activation time by using a set of parameters.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.1.56 FAJ 121 1488: Dual TMA Support


This feature allows Receiver (RX) diversity supervision when each antenna
branch is connected to a dual 3GPP Iuant (AISG v2.0) TMA. One of the dual
TMAs is supervised using the standard 3GPP Iuant (AISG v2.0) TMA supervision,
while the other dual TMA is supervised by detection of changes in the DC current
used by the TMA.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 25


Basic Features

This feature requires the FAJ 121 1242: Support for AISG and CWA TMAs to be
activated.

2.1.57 FAJ 121 1500: Support for High Capacity MSC in Pool
This feature increases the number of Network Resource Identifier (NRI) values
that can be associated and configured for each MSC Iu interface in the RNC. The
maximum number of NRI values for each MSC Iu interface is increased from 8 to
32 with this feature active.

This feature requires the RAN feature FAJ 121 971: MSC in Pool to be activated.

For other information, including activation and deactivation, see Iu Flex.

2.1.58 FAJ 121 1519: Multistandard Node


The Multistandard Node feature enables the possibility to run more multiple
3GPP technologies (WCDMA, GSM, and LTE) simultaneously in the same Node
B. When this feature is enabled, one logical node (GSM, WCDMA, or LTE) has
the master control role for the site functions such as power, climate, and external
alarms. The other logical nodes are in standby mode.

2.1.59 FAJ 121 1636: Flexible Intra Frequency Measurement Initiation


This feature allows the operator to turn off the use of Event 1c Measurement
Reports, used for Intra Frequency HO. In a bad radio environment, a risk can
occur that when Event 1c Measurement is turned on, frequent RL replacements
can be triggered by Event 1c Measurement, and many of those are not necessary
to execute. With Event 1c Measurement turned off, fewer RL replacement
procedures, Soft or Softer HOs are executed. As a result, a faster HO to another
RAT or frequency is made and amount of unnecessary load on the RNC
decreases.

For more information, refer to Handover.

2.1.60 FAJ 121 3661: Multi-Standard Traffic Management - GSM


The feature enables traffic management between WCDMA and GSM. The
specific functions included are GSM handover and cell reselection, directed retry,
emergency call redirect to GSM, and service-based handover to GSM. The feature
provides the following benefits:

— Possibility to use GSM networks as a fallback if the coverage is lost in the


WCDMA network

— Possibility to use the WCDMA network to offload the GSM network in case of
high traffic load in that network

26 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Maintaining intersystem mobility with retained UE calls and PDP contexts

— Possibility for operators to divide their subscribers into different service


categories and steer the subscribers to the most suitable access technology
for that service

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model and see descriptions of the following features:

— FAJ 121 154: GSM Handover and Cell Reselection, see FAJ 121 154: GSM
Handover and Cell Reselection on page 16

— FAJ 121 406: Directed Retry to GSM, see FAJ 121 406: Directed Retry to GSM
on page 16

— FAJ 121 748: Emergency Call Re-Direct to GSM, see FAJ 121 748:
Emergency Call Re-Direct to GSM on page 17

— FAJ 121 799: Service Based Handover, see FAJ 121 799: Service Based
Handover on page 18

Note: Since W16A the feature has been supported by Baseband 52.

2.1.61 FAJ 121 3663: Radio Network Efficiency


The feature provides the capability of deploying an efficient WCDMA network
to be used as a base for later additions of more advanced functionalities.
It includes UTRAN Registration Area Handling, Traffic Handling Priority, Inter-
Frequency Load Sharing (IFLS), and Multi Band Support. The following benefits
are achieved:

— Reduction of the service reactivation time for interactive packet users


compared to setting up the connection from Idle Mode

— Short speech call setup times

— Reduction of the amount of signaling towards the RNC and the CN in


Connected Mode

— Reduction of the UE battery consumption

— Different priority setting for interactive packet data by using the Traffic
Handling Priority (THP) value received from the CN

— A separate priority for interactive packet data with the signaling priority set
from the CN

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model and see descriptions of the following features:

— FAJ 121 405: Inter Frequency Handover and Cell Reselection, see FAJ 121
405: Inter Frequency Handover and Cell Reselection on page 16

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 27


Basic Features

— FAJ 121 407: UTRAN Registration Area Handling, see FAJ 121 407: UTRAN
Registration Area Handling on page 16

— FAJ 121 408: Active Queue Management for the Interactive RAB, see FAJ
121 408: Active Queue Management for the Interactive RAB on page 17

— FAJ 121 435: Inter-Frequency Load Sharing, see FAJ 121 435: Inter-
Frequency Load Sharing on page 17

— FAJ 121 902: Inter-Frequency Load Distribution, see FAJ 121 902: Inter-
Frequency Load Distribution on page 18

— FAJ 121 928: Multi-Band Support, see FAJ 121 928: Multi-Band Support on
page 19

— FAJ 121 1022: Domain Specific Access Class Barring, see FAJ 121 1022:
Domain Specific Access Class Barring on page 20

— FAJ 121 1093: Flexible Quality of Service and Allocation/Retention


Handling, see FAJ 121 1093: Flexible Quality of Service and Allocation/
Retention Handling on page 20

— FAJ 121 1094: Traffic Handling Priority, see FAJ 121 1094: Traffic Handling
Priority on page 21

— FAJ 121 1128: Transmit Diversity, see FAJ 121 1128: Transmit Diversity on
page 22

— FAJ 121 1332: Load Triggered Access Class Barring, see FAJ 121 1332: Load
Triggered Access Class Barring on page 22

— FAJ 121 1402: Inter-Frequency Load Based Handover, see FAJ 121 1402:
Inter-Frequency Load Based Handover on page 23

— FAJ 121 1468: Non-HSPA Inter-Frequency Load Sharing, refer to FAJ 121
1468: Non-HSPA Inter-Frequency Load Sharing on page 25.

— FAJ 121 1636: Flexible Intra Frequency Measurement Initiation, see FAJ 121
1636: Flexible Intra Frequency Measurement Initiation on page 26

— FAJ 121 425: Max Bit Rate Capability for QoS Profiling, see FAJ 121 425:
Max Bit Rate Capability for QoS Profiling on page 39

Note: For each of the listed related features, information on Baseband Radio
Node support is included in Table 1.

2.1.62 FAJ 121 4035: GSM or Inter-Frequency Handover Based on Permission


Configuration
The feature introduces two new parameters for each Radio Access Bearer (RAB),
which enables the operator to prohibit a specific RAB from using Inter-Frequency
Handover (IFHO), Inter Radio Access Technology Handover (IRATHO), or both.

28 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For more information, refer to GSM or Inter-Frequency Handover Based on


Permission Configuration.

2.1.63 FAJ 121 4160: Multi-Sector Per Radio


The Multi-Sector Per Radio feature allows using a reduced number of radio units
at sites with the following benefits:
— Improved coverage by enabling the configuration of multiple sectors for one
radio unit.

— Decreased power consumption as fewer radio units are required to provide


an improved coverage.

— Decreased site lease costs as fewer radio units need to be installed.

— Easier site installation and hardware transportation.

The feature introduces support for the following configurations:

— Dual sectors configured on one 4TX/4RX radio, for example, RRUS 32

— Dual sectors configured on a radio group of one 2TX/2RX radio and one
0TX/2RX radio, for example, RRUS 12 and RRUS A2

More information about this feature can be found in Multi-Sector per Radio,
WCDMA RBS Configuration Guidelines, RBS Configurations, File Descriptions for
Site Configuration, and Antenna and RF Connections.

2.1.64 FAJ 121 4278: Manual Control of RNC Iub Link Allocation
Manual allocation of an IubLink to a certain Module Controller (MC) is possible.
Also, certain IubLinks can be grouped on the same MC or different MCs.

The feature supports the following:

— Manual allocation of an RNC IubLink to a certain MC in the RNC

— Giving the IubLinks different weight values

— Initiation of IubLink reallocation

More information about this feature can be found in Manual Control of RNC Iub
Link Allocation.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 29


Basic Features

2.2 HSDPA
This section describes HSDPA Basic Features.

2.2.1 FAJ 121 801: HSDPA Mobility

The HSDPA Mobility feature reduces user data interruption for HSDPA
mobility, thereby improving subscriber-perceived quality.

The feature enables the HSDPA user to change a cell with a minimal user data
interruption. The HS-DSCH channel carrying the DL user data is a shared channel,
and therefore, not eligible for Soft or Softer HO. Instead, the mobility procedure
is serving HS-DSCH cell change, enabling the system to direct the UE to a chosen
target cell and reserve resources in this cell before the transmission in the source
cell is stopped, and the bit stream is redirected to the target cell. In addition to HS
cell change, the feature also supports HS cell selection on a separate frequency.

For more information, see Handover.

2.2.2 FAJ 121 860: HSDPA Mobility Phase 2

The HSDPA Mobility Phase 2 feature enables service continuity for all
RABs on DCH/HSPDA, also when crossing RNC borders using Iur. The
establishment and fall back to and from HSDPA is supported.

The feature addresses improvements in mobility related to inter-RNC, inter-


frequency, and IRAT. These use cases, previously handled through state
transitions in Idle Mode are now managed entirely in Connected Mode. It also
supports HSDPA mobility over Iur. This feature enables transitions between
HSDPA and DCH and covers the support for all DCH/HSDPA RAB combinations
over Iur.

For more information, see Handover.

2.2.3 FAJ 121 903: HSDPA 16QAM

The HSDPA 16QAM feature increases user bit rate in favorable radio
conditions and increases system capacity.

With this feature activated, 16-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16 QAM) can
be used in the radio node when supported by the UE. Depending on connection
quality, the radio node can shift back and forth between 16 QAM and Quadrature
Phase Shift Keying (QPSK).

30 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For more information on 16 QAM, see HSDPA User Plane.

2.2.4 FAJ 121 904: HSDPA Proportional Fair Scheduling

The HSDPA Proportional Fair Scheduling feature uses UE radio condition


measurements to allow both high system capacity and fairness among
users.

Scheduling strategy is important for the use of a shared channel. The scheduler
transmits information to one user per 2 ms TTI (Transmission Time Interval)
using the UE measurements to efficiently transmit information to each UE at a
favourable timing, thereby increasing the system capacity. This strategy favors
users having good radio conditions while still providing users in less favorable
radio conditions a fair part of system resources.

2.2.5 FAJ 121 905: HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB

The HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB feature allows to have up to 384 kbps
uplink data rate together with the HSDPA downlink.

This feature provides an interactive RAB for HSDPA with an UL 16 kbps, 128
kbps, and 384 kbps bit rate and a DL maximum bit rate depending on UE
capability. Up to 15 codes are supported, and the number of codes that are
allocated to the UE depends on the Radio Resource Management functionality,
the cell and license configuration, and the UE capability. Both QPSK and 16 QAM
are supported.

2.2.6 FAJ 121 967: HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation

The HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation feature automatically reduces the


HSDPA code allocation to the increased DCH traffic and raises it when the
DCH traffic is decreased. The feature automatically adapts HSDPA code
allocation to asymmetric sector traffic.

The feature automatically adapts the HSDPA code allocation to the DCH traffic
load, favoring, for instance, voice traffic in busy hour. For HW designed not to
have full 15 code support in all cells, this feature adapts to asymmetric sector
load. This is done by automatically allocating more HSDPA codes to a sector with
more HSDPA users.

The maximum number of codes that can be added is controlled by the license
level of the optional feature FAJ 121 2722: Number of HSDPA Codes per
Cell and Baseband NodeBLocalCell::maxNumHsPdschCodes or DU Radio Node
RbsLocalCell::maxNumHsPdschCodes attribute.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 31


Basic Features

2.2.7 FAJ 121 968: HSDPA Flexible Scheduler

The HSDPA Flexible Scheduler feature allows flexibility of trading system


capacity with fairness among users on the cell level.

Scheduling strategy is of a fundamental importance when using a shared


channel. The HSDPA Flexible Scheduler feature allows the operator to have
specific trade of system capacity and fairness among users on the cell level.

The Flexible Scheduler feature includes the following functions:

— Code multiplexing allowing the radio node to send HSDPA data to more than
one user simultaneously.

— High-Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH) power control.

— Additional priority queue selections.

For more information about HSDPA scheduler, see HSDPA User Plane.

2.2.8 FAJ 121 969: HSDPA Code Multiplexing and HS-SCCH Power Control

The HSDPA Code Multiplexing and HS-SCCH Power Control feature


improves system throughput and number of users served at a given delay.
The feature also reduces radio node output power for HS-SCCH signaling.

Code multiplexing is a complementary method to time multiplexing (introduced


in P4 and enhanced in W16B) that gives the possibility to share the HS-DSCH
resource among users in both code and time domain. The overall performance is
therefore improved, in terms of system throughput and a number of users served
at a given delay. HS-SCCH power control reduces the Node B output power
needed for the HS-SCCHs and increases the system capacity.

The enhancement improves HS user experience by optimizing the calculation of


HS-SCCH power and HS-PDSCH power.

For information about HSDPA scheduler, see HSDPA User Plane and for
information about Power Control on HSDPA, see Power Control.

2.2.9 FAJ 121 988: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA Interactive 64/HS RAB
Combination
This feature enables the combination of a conversational RAB for 12.2 kbps
AMR-coded speech and an interactive RAB for HSDPA with an UL 64 kbps bit
rate and a DL maximum bit rate depending on UE capability. The feature includes
support for 16 kbps UL.

32 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 1033: HSDPA Introduction Package

— FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB for AMR Speech

— FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet Data RAB Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.2.10 FAJ 121 989: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA Interactive up to 384/HS RAB
Combination
This feature is the combination of a conversational RAB for 12.2 kbps AMR-
coded speech and an interactive RAB for HSDPA with an UL 128 kbps or 384
kbps bit rate and a DL maximum bit rate depending on UE capability.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 905: HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB

— FAJ 121 988: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA Interactive 64/HS RAB
Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.2.11 FAJ 121 1004: HSDPA CQI Adjustment

The HSDPA CQI Adjustment feature provides high system performance


when different UE units report different CQI values for the given quality.

The Channel Quality Indication (CQI) has a large impact on the performance of
an HSDPA system, as it is used by the scheduler and in the link adaptation. The
CQI is reported by the UE. To provide high system performance, even in situations
where different UE units report different CQI values for the given quality, the CQI
adjustment feature is introduced.

For more information on CQI, see HSDPA User Plane.

2.2.12 FAJ 121 1010: WCDMA Cell Carriers


This feature defines the licensed level of the number of High-Speed Downlink
Packet Access (HSDPA) cell carriers that can be used for each Node B.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 33


Basic Features

2.2.13 FAJ 121 1033: HSDPA Introduction Package

The HSDPA Introduction Package feature increases bit rate in the downlink,
provides higher system capacity and reduced round trip time.

This package consists of the following seven features that improve the system
capabilities to handle DL PS data:

— FAJ 121 842: HSDPA Introduction

— FAJ 121 895: HSDPA TN Optimization

— FAJ 121 906, HSDPA Interactive 64/HS RAB, 5 codes

— FAJ 121 1097: Fast HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation

— FAJ 121 1010: HSDPA Cell Carriers, (with up to 3 HSDPA cell carriers)

— FAJ 121 1011: HSDPA Users per Cell, (with up to 4 users per cell)

— FAJ 121 0332: HSDPA Codes per Cell, (with up to 5 codes per cell)

For more information about HSDPA, see HSDPA User Plane.

2.2.14 FAJ 121 1058: Incremental Redundancy

The Incremental Redundancy feature improves the radio link performance


by improving the chances of the User Equipment (UE) successfully decoding
transmission on the High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH).

The transmitted coded bits are changed before a retransmission attempt. This
improves performance compared to standard method, Chase Combining, where
the retransmission contains the same coded bits as the original transmission. The
feature provides better performance, especially for high initial code rates, but
requires higher requirements on the soft buffering in the UE since soft bits from
all transmission attempts must be buffered before decoding. See Multiplexing
and channel coding (FDD), 3GPP TS 25.212 for more details.

The feature is always used for UE configured with MIMO regardless of whether
the IR feature is enabled or not.

34 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.2.15 FAJ 121 1091: HSPA Max Bit Rate for QoS Profiling

The HSPA Max Bit Rate for QoS Profiling feature allows defining the
maximum bit rate for interactive mobile data users on HSDPA and on EUL.

This feature limits the bit rate on HSDPA and EUL for mobile data users, based on
the Maximum Bit Rate (MBR) values received from the CN.

For more information, see HSPA QoS Profiling.

2.2.16 FAJ 121 1114: HSDPA and Enhanced Uplink Service Indicator

The HSDPA and Enhanced Uplink Service Indicator feature allows


broadcasting a service indicator to end users.

This feature enables service indicator broadcasting (using SIB5) to end users so
they can see on their UE if HSDPA or both HSDPA and EUL are available in the
present location.

For more information on SIB5, see Idle Mode and Common Channel Behavior.

2.2.17 FAJ 121 1115: HSDPA QoS Scheduler

The HSDPA QoS Scheduler feature provides the support of QoS with
HSDPA, and the support of Traffic Handling Priority (THP) for HSDPA.

The feature considers the respective QoS priority classes and QoS attributes, for
the guaranteed PS services using HSDPA. The function is also used to support
THP for HSDPA users.

For more information about HSDPA Scheduler, see HSDPA User Plane.

2.2.18 FAJ 121 1304: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple HSDPA PS Interactive RAB
Combination
This feature provides the support for the combination of a conversational RAB
for 12.2 kbps AMR-coded speech and three simultaneous interactive RABs on
HSDPA for best effort packet data. This means that the end user can have three
parallel interactive services running over HSDPA connections at the same time as
a speech call is conducted.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 1072: Three Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 35


Basic Features

— FAJ 121 1103: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple PS Interactive RAB
Combination

— FAJ 121 1075: Speech 12.2 kbps and Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB
Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.2.19 FAJ 121 1513: Increased HSDPA Code Capacity on HS-TX


The feature increases the number of HSDPA codes available for non-multicarrier
users when the HSDPA processing resource module on the Node B HS-TX board
is connected with two HSDPA cells.

The feature increases the following:

— The number of HSDPA codes for single-carrier non-MIMO users and single-
carrier single-stream MIMO users is increased from 20 to 26 HSDPA codes
shared over the two cells.

— The number of HSDPA codes for single-carrier dual-stream MIMO users is


increased from 15 to 18 HSDPA codes shared over the two cells.

This feature requires the optional feature FAJ 121 842: HSDPA Introduction.

Additional features as FAJ 121 1318: Support for MIMO 2x2 and FAJ 121 401:
15 HSDPA codes cell are necessary to use the feature functions fully.

For more information, refer to HSDPA User Plane.

2.2.20 FAJ 121 3664: HSPA Performance


The feature provides high peak bit rates, high system capacity and reduced round
trip delay in a WCDMA network. Both DL and UL are addressed and the feature
sets the baseline for further enhancements and deployment of advanced HSPA
functionality. The feature provides following benefits:

— Higher bit rate in DL and UL

— Higher system capacity

— Reduced round trip time

— Improved delay characteristics

The enhanced EUL Scheduler targets inactive users and scenarios with high
external interference. The enhancement provides the following benefits:

— Lower latency for bursty users

36 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Increased robustness for CPC

— Increased application coverage in scenarios with high external interference

With the higher bit rate and shorter round trip time, new types of services can
be introduced in the network. The higher capacity achieved for packet data users
reduces the production cost for each Gigabyte for the operator.

For more information about the activation details, refer to Licenses and
Hardware Activation Codes in Ericsson Software Modeland see descriptions of
the following features:

— FAJ 121 801: HSDPA Mobility, see FAJ 121 801: HSDPA Mobility on page 30

— FAJ 121 860: HSDPA Mobility Phase 2, see FAJ 121 860: HSDPA Mobility
Phase 2 on page 30

— FAJ 121 903: HSDPA 16QAM, see FAJ 121 903: HSDPA 16QAM on page 30

— FAJ 121 904: HSDPA Proportional Fair Scheduling, see FAJ 121 904: HSDPA
Proportional Fair Scheduling on page 31

— FAJ 121 905: HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB, see FAJ 121 905: HSDPA
Interactive 384/HS RAB on page 31

— FAJ 121 967: HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation, see FAJ 121 967: HSDPA
Dynamic Code Allocation on page 31

— FAJ 121 968: HSDPA Flexible Scheduler, see FAJ 121 968: HSDPA Flexible
Scheduler on page 32

— FAJ 121 969: HSDPA Code Multiplexing and HS-SCCH Power Control, see
FAJ 121 969: HSDPA Code Multiplexing and HS-SCCH Power Control on
page 32

— FAJ 121 1004: HSDPA CQI Adjustment, see FAJ 121 1004: HSDPA CQI
Adjustment on page 33

— FAJ 121 1033: HSDPA Introduction Package, see FAJ 121 1033: HSDPA
Introduction Package on page 34

— FAJ 121 1058: Incremental Redundancy, see FAJ 121 1058: Incremental
Redundancy on page 34

— FAJ 121 1091: HSPA Max Bit Rate for QoS Profiling, see FAJ 121 1091:
HSPA Max Bit Rate for QoS Profiling on page 35

— FAJ 121 1114: HSDPA and Enhanced Uplink Service Indicator, see FAJ 121
1114: HSDPA and Enhanced Uplink Service Indicator on page 35

— FAJ 121 1115: HSDPA QoS Scheduler, see FAJ 121 1115: HSDPA QoS
Scheduler on page 35

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 37


Basic Features

— FAJ 121 1328: Enhanced Layer 2, see FAJ 121 1328: Enhanced Layer 2 on
page 22

— FAJ 121 1358: Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation, see FAJ 121 1358:
Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation on page 23

— FAJ 121 1002: Enhanced UL Mobility, see FAJ 121 1002: Enhanced UL
Mobility on page 48

— FAJ 121 1023: Enhanced Uplink Introduction Package, see FAJ 121 1023:
Enhanced Uplink Introduction Package on page 48

— FAJ 121 1111: EUL QoS Scheduler, see FAJ 121 1111: EUL QoS Scheduler on
page 49

— FAJ 121 1333: Advanced Receivers, GRAKE in RBS, see FAJ 121 1333:
Advanced Receivers, GRAKE in RBS on page 49

— FAJ 121 1345: Downlink Power Control for EUL, see FAJ 121 1345: Downlink
Power Control for EUL on page 50

— FAJ 121 1443: EUL Single HARQ Process Scheduling, see FAJ 121 1443: EUL
Single HARQ Process Scheduling on page 24

Note: For each of the listed related features, information on Baseband Radio
Node support is included in Table 1.

Since W15.1, the feature has been enhanced with improved CE handling for
non-serving EUL links that allows for better UL throughput in soft handover.
The enhancement is also pre-delivered in W14.0-W15.0, in maintenance release
W14.0.2.12, W14.1.2.9, and W15.0.1.3.

2.3 Services and Radio Access Bearers


This section describes basic features in the Services and Radio Access
Bearers functional area.

2.3.1 FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB for AMR Speech


This is a conversational RAB for 12.2 kbps Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR) coded
speech to the Circuit Switched Core Network (CSCN) domain. The RAB also
supports Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) and the transfer of silence descriptor.
The 12.2 kbps AMR-coded speech has a speech quality that corresponds to the
GSM Enhanced Full-Rate (EFR) quality.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

38 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.3.2 FAJ 121 147: Conversational RAB for 64 kbps Multimedia


This is a conversational RAB for 64 kbps multimedia to the CSCN domain.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.3 FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data
This is an interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps (in the DL) best effort packet data
service to the Packet Switched Core Network (PSCN) domain. The Radio Bearers
(RBs) that are used over the radio interface for this RAB are 16/16, 16/64,
64/16, 64/64, 64/128, and 64/384 kbps. Lower data rates are also supported by
different transport formats.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.4 FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet Data RAB Combination
This feature allows the combination of a conversational RAB for 12.2 kbps AMR-
coded speech to the CSCN domain and a 64 kbps interactive RAB for a best effort
packet data service to the PSCN domain.

This feature requires the optional feature FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to
384 kbps packet data, and FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB for AMR speech, to
be installed.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.5 FAJ 121 413: Two times PS Interactive RAB Combination


This feature is the combination of two simultaneous interactive RABs for best
effort packet data services to the PSCN domain.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for
up to 384 kbps Packet Data.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.6 FAJ 121 425: Max Bit Rate Capability for QoS Profiling
This feature allows the PSCN to set a maximum bit rate for the interactive RAB
on Dedicated Channel (DCH) and limit the RB to 16 kbps, 64 kbps, 128 kbps, or
384 kbps for the interactive RAB.

This feature is only applicable together with the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 39


Basic Features

— FAJ 121 980 and FAJ 121 981 for the higher uplink data rates, if this feature
is used for the higher UL rates.

— Other RAB feature combinations with an interactive RAB on DCH.

For more information, refer to Channel Switching.

2.3.7 FAJ 121 553: Speech and Two Simultaneous Interactive RABs for Packet
Data
This feature provides the support for the combination of a conversational RAB
for 12.2 kbps AMR-coded speech and two simultaneous interactive RABs for best
effort packet data. This means the end user can have two parallel interactive
services running at the same time as a speech call is conducted.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet Data RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 413: Two Times PS Interactive RAB Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.8 FAJ 121 754: Speech and 0 kbps Packet Data


This feature is the combination of a conversational RAB for 12.2 kbps AMR coded
speech to the CSCN domain and a 0/0 kbps UL/DL rate for an interactive RAB
for a best effort packet data service to the PSCN domain. This feature allows for
a more efficient use of the radio resources for users with speech and packet data
RAB combination.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB for AMR Speech

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data

— FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet Data RAB Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.9 FAJ 121 757: Conversational RAB for 64 kbps CS Multimedia and 8 kbps
Packet Data RAB Combination
This feature enables the combination of a conversational RAB for 64 kbps
multimedia to the CSCN domain and interactive RAB for a best effort packet
data service to the PSCN domain.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

40 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— FAJ 121 147: R1 Conversational RAB for 64 kbps Multimedia

— FAJ 121 148: R2 Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.10 FAJ 121 244: Positioning Service, Cell Accuracy


The positioning service allows a Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC) to
request the position of UE. The positioning information is requested and made
available over the Iu interface. If not complemented with optional features
enhancing the accuracy, the provided accuracy corresponds to the cell size.

For more information including activation and deactivation instructions, refer to


Basic UE Positioning.

2.3.11 FAJ 121 977: Flexible Initial Rate Selection, PS Interactive


The Flexible Initial Rate Selection Feature allows each cell to select the rate at
which the packet interactive RAB is established. High initial rate is beneficial
to the end user since it takes shorter time before high throughput is reached.
On the other hand, in areas where coverage for the higher rate is not provided,
selecting a lower initial rate is a better solution. This feature offers the possibility
to select a higher initial rate in areas with good coverage without compromising
the performance in areas where coverage for the higher rate is not provided.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 845: Dynamic PS I/B RAB Establishment

— FAJ 121 148: R2 Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.12 FAJ 121 980: Interactive RAB for up to 128 kbps, Uplink
The Interactive RAB feature provides a best effort packet data service to the
PSCN domain. With this feature, the end user can get a higher data rate on the
UL, up to 128 kbps. This allows sending larger volumes of data, for instance large
emails or pictures, in shorter time.

This feature requires the optional features FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to
384 kbps.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 41


Basic Features

2.3.13 FAJ 121 981: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps, Uplink
The Interactive RAB feature provides a best effort packet data service to the
PSCN domain. With this feature, the end user can get a higher data rate on the
UL, up to 384 kbps. This allows sending larger volumes of data, for instance large
emails or pictures, in shorter time.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps

— FAJ 121 980: Interactive RAB for up to 128 kbps Uplink

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.14 FAJ 121 985: Conversational RAB for Multimode AMR Speech
This is a capacity and coverage enhancing feature for the speech service. The
feature provides a conversational RAB for multimode AMR speech with the
rates 12.2, 7.95, 5.9, and 4.75 kbps. With this feature, the operator can choose
between two different realization alternatives for this RAB, that is, with single-
rate or multi-rate RB.

The multimode AMR speech RAB with single-rate RB is realized over the radio
interface with separate RBs for the different rates. This enables to use a higher
Spreading Factor (SF) for the two lower rates. The 12.2 kbps and 7.95 kbps rates
use the DL SF 128 and the rates 5.9 kbps and 4.75 kbps, the SF 256.

The multimode AMR speech RAB with multi-rate RB is realized over the radio
interface with an RB combination that can change rate by just changing the
transport format combination and that allows both the Core Network (CN) and
the User Equipment (UE) to change instantaneously to any of the allowed rates.
This allows the UE to autonomously change to a lower speech codec rate, for
instance, because of the UL coverage.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB
for AMR Speech.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.15 FAJ 121 1012: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS Interactive RAB for up to 384
kbps Downlink
The speech and interactive RAB combination enables to have a CS speech call
and a best effort packet data service at the same time. With this feature, having
up to 384 kbps DL packet data rate is possible during an ongoing speech call.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet
Data RAB Combination.

42 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.16 FAJ 121 1013: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS Interactive RAB for up to 128
kbps Uplink
The speech and interactive RAB combination enables to have a CS speech call
and a best effort packet data service simultaneously. With this feature, having up
to 128 kbps UL packet data rate is possible during an ongoing speech call.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet
Data RAB Combination.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.17 FAJ 121 1069: Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination
This feature provides the support for two simultaneous interactive RABs on
HSDPA, for best effort packet data services to the PSCN domain. This means
the end user can have two parallel interactive services running over HSDPA
connections at the same time.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data

— FAJ 121 413: Two times PS Interactive RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 842: HSDPA Introduction

— FAJ 121 906: HSDPA Interactive 64/HS RAB

— FAJ 121 905: HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.18 FAJ 121 1070: Multiple HSPA PS Interactive RAB Combination


This feature provides the support for up to three simultaneous interactive RABs
on EUL and HSDPA, for best effort packet data services to the PSCN domain.
This means that the end user can have two or three parallel interactive services
running over EUL and HSDPA connections at the same time and can benefit from
the high throughput offered by these technologies.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 1069: Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive PS RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 990: Enhanced Uplink Interactive

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 43


Basic Features

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.19 FAJ 121 1071: Three Times PS Interactive RAB Combination


This feature provides the support for three simultaneous interactive RABs, for
best effort packet data services to the PSCN domain. This means that the end
user can have three parallel interactive services running over at the same time.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data

— FAJ 121 413: Two Times PS Interactive RAB Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.20 FAJ 121 1072: Three Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination
This feature provides the support for three simultaneous interactive RABs on
HSDPA, for best effort packet data services to the PSCN domain. This means
that the end user can have three parallel interactive services running over HSDPA
connections at the same time.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data

— FAJ 121 413: Two Times PS Interactive RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 1071: Three Times PS Interactive RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 842: HSDPA Introduction

— FAJ 121 906: HSDPA Interactive 64/HS RAB

— FAJ 121 905: HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB

— FAJ 121 1069: Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.21 FAJ 121 1075: Speech 12.2 kbps and Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive
RAB Combination
This feature provides the support for the combination of a conversational RAB
for 12.2 kbps AMR-coded speech and two simultaneous interactive RABs on
HSDPA for best effort packet data. This means that the end user can have two
parallel interactive services running over HSDPA connections at the same time as
a speech call is conducted.

44 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB for AMR Speech 12.2 kbps

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data

— FAJ 121 413: Two Times PS Interactive RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet Data RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 842: HSDPA Introduction

— FAJ 121 906: HSDPA Interactive 64/HS RAB

— FAJ 121 905: HSDPA Interactive 384/HS RAB

— FAJ 121 1069: Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive PS RAB Combination

— FAJ 121 553: Speech and Two Simultaneous Interactive RABs for Packet
Data

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.22 FAJ 121 1103: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple PS Interactive RAB
Combination
This feature provides the support for the combination of a conversational RAB
for 12.2 kbps AMR-coded speech and three simultaneous interactive RABs for
best effort packet data. This means that the end user can have three parallel
interactive services running at the same time as a speech call is conducted.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 553: Speech and Two Simultaneous Interactive RABs for Packet
Data

— FAJ 121 1071: Three Times PS Interactive RAB Combination

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.3.23 FAJ 121 1158: Stand Alone SRB 3.4 kbps


This feature introduces the possibility to have a standalone SRB of 3.4 kbps
instead of 13.6 kbps. The lower signalling rate, consuming fewer resources, offers
the possibility to improve the coverage of the Signalling Radio Bearer (SRB) at
the cost of a longer call setup time. If paired with, for instance, lower rate speech
coding, extending the speech service coverage in a cell is possible.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 45


Basic Features

2.3.24 FAJ 121 3662: RAN Services


The feature offers support for the most common RAB combinations needed to
provide services for both voice and data. It provides the possibility to increase the
capacity and coverage for the speech service. The feature provides the following
benefits:

— Optimizing simultaneous use of speech and data, with regards to capacity


and coverage

— Getting a fast service access time for the end user

— Selecting the initial packet rate according to the typical applications used

— Reducing the time before the end user reaches high throughput

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model and see descriptions of the following features:

— FAJ 121 845: Dynamic PS I/B RAB Establishment, see FAJ 121 845:
Dynamic PS I/B RAB Establishment on page 18

— FAJ 121 146: Conversational RAB for AMR Speech, see FAJ 121 146:
Conversational RAB for AMR Speech on page 38

— FAJ 121 147: Conversational RAB for 64 kbps Multimedia, see FAJ 121 147:
Conversational RAB for 64 kbps Multimedia on page 39

— FAJ 121 148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data, see FAJ 121
148: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps Packet Data on page 39

— FAJ 121 150: Speech and Packet Data RAB Combination, see FAJ 121 150:
Speech and Packet Data RAB Combination on page 39

— FAJ 121 413: Two times PS Interactive RAB Combination, see FAJ 121 413:
Two times PS Interactive RAB Combination on page 39

— FAJ 121 553: Max Bit Rate Capability for QoS Profiling, see FAJ 121 553:
Speech and Two Simultaneous Interactive RABs for Packet Data on page 40

— FAJ 121 754: Speech and 0 kbps Packet Data, see FAJ 121 754: Speech and
0 kbps Packet Data on page 40

— FAJ 121 757: Conversational RAB for 64 kbps CS Multimedia and 8 kbps
Packet Data RAB Combination, see FAJ 121 757: Conversational RAB for 64
kbps CS Multimedia and 8 kbps Packet Data RAB Combination on page 40

— FAJ 121 977: Flexible Initial Rate Selection, PS Interactive, see FAJ 121 977:
Flexible Initial Rate Selection, PS Interactive on page 41

— FAJ 121 980: Interactive RAB for up to 128 kbps, Uplink, see FAJ 121 980:
Interactive RAB for up to 128 kbps, Uplink on page 41

46 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— FAJ 121 981: Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps, Uplink, see FAJ 121 981:
Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps, Uplink on page 42

— FAJ 121 985: Conversational RAB for Multimode AMR Speech, see FAJ 121
985: Conversational RAB for Multimode AMR Speech on page 42

— FAJ 121 1012: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS Interactive RAB for up to 384 kbps
Downlink, see FAJ 121 1012: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS Interactive RAB for
up to 384 kbps Downlink on page 42

— FAJ 121 1013: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS Interactive RAB for up to 128 kbps
Uplink, see FAJ 121 1013: Speech 12.2 kbps and PS Interactive RAB for up to
128 kbps Uplink on page 43

— FAJ 121 1069: Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination, see FAJ
121 1069: Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination on page 43

— FAJ 121 1070: Multiple HSPA PS Interactive RAB Combination, see FAJ 121
1070: Multiple HSPA PS Interactive RAB Combination on page 43

— FAJ 121 1071: Three Times PS Interactive RAB Combination, see FAJ 121
1071: Three Times PS Interactive RAB Combination on page 44

— FAJ 121 1072: Three Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination, see
FAJ 121 1072: Three Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB Combination on page
44

— FAJ 121 1075: Speech 12.2 kbps and Two Times HSDPA PS Interactive RAB
Combination, see FAJ 121 1075: Speech 12.2 kbps and Two Times HSDPA
PS Interactive RAB Combination on page 44

— FAJ 121 1103: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple PS Interactive RAB
Combination, see FAJ 121 1103: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple PS
Interactive RAB Combination on page 45

— FAJ 121 1158: Stand Alone SRB 3.4 kbps, see FAJ 121 1158: Stand Alone
SRB 3.4 kbps on page 45

— FAJ 121 988: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA Interactive 64/HS RAB
Combination, see FAJ 121 988: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA Interactive
64/HS RAB Combination on page 32

— FAJ 121 989: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA Interactive up to 384/HS RAB
Combination, see FAJ 121 989: Speech 12.2 kbps and HSDPA Interactive up
to 384/HS RAB Combination on page 33

— FAJ 121 1304: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple HSDPA PS Interactive RAB
Combination, see FAJ 121 1304: Speech 12.2 kbps and Multiple HSDPA PS
Interactive RAB Combination on page 35

Note: Since W16A the feature has been supported by Baseband 52.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 47


Basic Features

2.4 Enhanced Uplink


This section describes EUL Basic Features.

2.4.1 FAJ 121 970: Enhanced Uplink Introduction


E-DCH Introduction is a group of functions that improves the system capabilities
to handle uplink packet switched data.

Uplink capacity is improved with Hybrid ARQ and fast scheduling in the Node B.
An improved Outer loop Power control as well as soft/softer handover are also
supported for E-DCH to decrease interference and improve capacity.

2.4.2 FAJ 121 1002: Enhanced UL Mobility

The Enhanced UL Mobility feature supports improved service continuity


when crossing RNC borders where RABs are maintained on EUL for intra-
frequency mobility.

This feature provides the same level of support for Enhanced UL mobility as
HSDPA Mobility Phase 2 provides for HSDPA, that is, ensuring service continuity
and DCH upswitch or fallback of PS connections including those over Iur.

For more information, see Handover.

2.4.3 FAJ 121 1023: Enhanced Uplink Introduction Package

The Enhanced Uplink Introduction Package is a group of features that


improves the system capability to handle UL PS data.

The functionality provides significantly higher peak rates, higher system capacity,
and a reduction of the round trip delay in the network. This feature gives the
minimum functionality to deploy EUL.

This package consists of the following RAN features:

— FAJ 121 970: Enhanced Uplink Introduction

— FAJ 121 990: Enhanced Uplink Interactive RAB, 2xSF4

— FAJ 121 1129: Enhanced Uplink Users per Cell (with four users per cell)

— FAJ 121 1050: 1.4 Mbps Enhanced Uplink

— FAJ 121 1054: Enhanced UpLink TN Optimization

48 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— FAJ 121 1135: EUL scheduler Enhancements

For more information, see WCDMA Uplink.

2.4.4 FAJ 121 1111: EUL QoS Scheduler

This EUL QoS Scheduler feature enables the support of subscriber priority
and service differentiation by using the THP and MBR attributes signaled by
the Core Network in the RAB assignment phase.

The THP attribute is translated into a relative scheduling priority for E-DCH and
transferred to the radio node at Radio Bearer setup and reconfiguration through
the NBAP Information Element Scheduling Priority Indicator, SPI. It is used in
the scheduler to grant different bit rates to users with different priority. This
procedure is applied to Interactive/Background services and the differentiation is
realized through for each SPI defined scheduling weights that can be configured
through operator parameters. These weights define the ratio of the bit rates
granted between users of different priority class.

The MBR attribute is transferred to the radio node through the NBAP Information
Element E-DCH Maximum Bit Rate and used in the scheduling grant mechanism
to limit the rate of a user.

For more information, see WCDMA Uplink.

2.4.5 FAJ 121 1135: EUL Scheduler Enhancements


The EUL Scheduler function is enhanced to improve end-user performance during
HOs and overload conditions.

This feature requires the optional RAN feature FAJ 121 1023: Enhanced Uplink
Introduction Package.

For more information, refer to WCDMA Uplink.

2.4.6 FAJ 121 1333: Advanced Receivers, GRAKE in RBS

The Advanced Receivers, GRAKE in RBS feature increases uplink bit rates in
multi path radio environments.

A generalized RAKE (GRAKE) receiver is introduced in the Node B to improve


achievable bit rates for EUL in multi-path radio environments. The functionality is
supported for configurations with and without receiver diversity.

For more information about GRAKE receiver, see WCDMA Uplink.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 49


Basic Features

2.4.7 FAJ 121 1345: Downlink Power Control for EUL

The Downlink Power Control for EUL feature increases downlink capacity
and bit rates through lower downlink output power usage.

Power control, based on Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), is applied to the


EUL-related E-DCH (Enhanced Dedicated Channels) HARQ Acknowledgement
Indicator Channel (E-HICH) DL signaling channel. The average Node B power
use is decreased, allowing higher capacity and higher bit rates in the DL.

For more information, see Power Control.

2.5 Transport Network


This section describes Transport Functionality Basic Features.

2.5.1 FAJ 121 131: ATM PVC/PVP Support


This feature is used for setting up ATM Permanent Virtual Channels (PVCs)
and ATM Permanent Virtual Paths (PVPs) for Iu, Iur, and Iub logical interfaces,
between WCDMA RANradio nodes, and to the CN. The feature is also used to
set up PVCs within the nodes for their internal control structure and capacity
configuration. The permanent connections are established and released using
management operations.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Configuration.

2.5.2 FAJ 121 132: Dynamic AAL2 Connections


The TN control plane is used to set up on-demand transport capacity using
dynamic AAL2 user plane connections for the Iu-CS, Iur, and Iub interfaces with
3GPP Access Link Control Application Part (ALCAP) signalling.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.3 FAJ 121 133: Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic
Iub, Iur, and Iu interfaces are all used for signalling over ATM Adaptation
Layer type 5 (AAL5) connections. By 3GPP, User Network Interface Signalling
ATM Adaptation Layer (UNI-SAAL) or Network Node Interface Signalling ATM
Adaptation Layer (NNI-SAAL) are used for control plane connections. AAL5
connections used internally between resources within Nodes B and RNC nodes
are set up dynamically, while network-wide AAL5 connections are set up by
configuration.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

50 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.5.4 FAJ 121 134: ATM on Fractional Transmission for 2G Transmission Sharing
For ATM connections in WCDMA RAN, it is possible to configure one E1/T1/J1
port or one VC11/VT-1.5 channel to use 1–31 (E1, Ch.STM-1 VC12) or 1–24
(T1/J1, Ch.OC-3 VT-1.5) time slots for ATM. The ATM on a Fractional is designed
to reduce the need for external transmission equipment and transmission links
when sharing transport between 2G and 3G, which can be motivated for small
Iub bandwidth requirements at initial rollout. For Iub bandwidth requirements
over one E1/T1, using Circuit Emulation for 2G transmission sharing is more
suitable, because Fractional E1s cannot be combined into common IMA groups
for the WCDMA RAN Iub interface.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.5 FAJ 121 135: Circuit Emulation over ATM for 2G Transmission Sharing
This feature enables transparent Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) connections
over the WCDMA ATM access network. I.363.1 structured mode is supported. The
feature is designed for combined WCDMA and 2G radio node sites, but can also
be used to carry other TDM-based traffic from the WCDMA site.

With Circuit Emulation performed within the WCDMA platform functionality


block, Carrier Class ISP is achieved for the emulated connection.

For shared Ericsson GSM and WCDMA radio node sites, a combination of
WCDMA RAN Circuit Emulation and FAJ 121 997: BSS RAN Abis Optimization
features is recommended. By freeing capacity using Abis Optimization, WCDMA
can be deployed without adding new transmission to the common site. Instead,
the transmission expansion can be phased to when it is motivated by for instance
HSPA peak rates or traffic growth.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.6 FAJ 121 136: Transport Redundancy


Transport boards and links can be configured with redundancy for all types of
physical links offered.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality and IP


Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.7 FAJ 121 137: Network Synchronization


Stable Network Synchronization is essential for RAN performance. Degraded
network synchronization has a negative impact on central Key Performance
Indicators (KPIs) such as dropped calls, accessibility, and retainability. The RNC
and Node B system clocks build up a synchronized chain to obtain a 50 ppb Node
B air carrier frequency accuracy.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 51


Basic Features

This feature includes the support for network synchronization distributed over
TDM transmission links, while a GPS reference solution for Node B is included in
FAJ 121 440: System Integrated GPS Network Synchronization. Synchronization
of IP transport connected nodes are included in the optional feature FAJ 121
1155: Network Synch Client for IP Transport for Node B.

For more information, refer to Synchronization.

2.5.8 FAJ 121 138: Node Synchronization


The Node Synchronization feature is the base for the Frame Synchronization.
The Node Synchronization feature generates node time references as well as
measures and provides frame reference timing relationships. The latter is done
by measuring the phase difference between the RNC and each Node B. The
measurement is vital for scheduling the frame transport between the RNC
and each Node B in an effective way, minimizing the transport or buffering
delays within UTRAN. The function enables sending WCDMA information frames
simultaneously to one mobile terminal from two or more Nodes B.

For more information, refer to Synchronization.

2.5.9 FAJ 121 364: RAN Topologies


Ericsson WCDMA RAN nodes can be configured using different topology
structures: star, chain, tree, and ring. In several of these options, the RAN nodes
can act as concentrators. A combination of ATM and IP in the TN for all interfaces
Iu, Iur, and Iub is possible.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.10 FAJ 121 368: ATM Interfaces in RAN


This feature covers the functions and characteristics of the transmission line
interface boards, also referred to as Exchange Terminal Boards (ETBs), for RNC
and Nodes B.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.11 FAJ 121 369: Inverse Multiplexing over ATM, IMA


Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) can be set up from E1/T1/J1 boards,
typically in Node B, to Channelized STM-1/OC-3 interface boards, typically in
RNC or Nodes B, over an intermediate PDH/SDH transmission network.

The purpose of IMA is to provide an inverse multiplexing of an ATM cell stream


over multiple physical links. Several physical links can thus be seen logically as
one unique ATM link with the capacity equal to the sum of the capacities of the
individual links.

52 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

This feature requires the P3 version or later of E1/T1/J1 transmission interface


boards, ET-MC1, and the P3 version of Channelized STM-1/OC3 board, MC41.

For more information, see Inverse Multiplexing over ATM.

2.5.12 FAJ 121 440: System Integrated GPS Network Synchronization


This feature provides an alternative to network synchronization over Time
Division Multiplexing (TDM) transmission links as described in FAJ 121 137,
or when using the Network Synch client in IP networks using FAJ 121 1155.
This feature allows the Node B to receive a network synchronization reference
from a local high-quality GPS/GNSS clock, using a GPS/GNSS receiver mounted
outdoors with a clear view of the sky.

This feature requires GPS HW.

2.5.13 FAJ 121 734: ATM RAN Transport Aggregation


This feature enables using radio nodes as Transport Aggregation Hub nodes to
build aggregated ATM network structures. By adding this option to any radio
node, the node type Hub-RBS is defined.

This feature is required for type C and D topologies described in FAJ 121 354:
RAN Topologies.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.14 FAJ 121 735: AAL2 Switching for Transport Aggregation


For RAN transport aggregation, Ericsson supports both Virtual Channel (VC)
cross connect of Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) and UBR+ VCs, as well as AAL2
Switching. UBR/UBR+ aggregation is described in FAJ 121 734: ATM RAN
Transport Aggregation. AAL2 switching gives additional benefits and efficiencies.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.15 FAJ 121 737: RAN Transport Quality of Service Separation


User plane transport bearers can be divided into different QoS classes with
different scheduling priority in the TN.

Configuration of QoS class for each transport bearer for both ATM and IP
transport requires activating the feature FAJ 121 966: Configurable Transport
Bearer QoS Class.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Configuration.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 53


Basic Features

2.5.16 FAJ 121 836: Transmission Power Priority


The battery power in the Node B can be configured to prioritize the transport
function. Setting the time for guaranteed transport functionality individually for
each RBS is possible. The function is especially useful in Hub-RBSs, cascaded
topologies, and for maintaining high ISP for combined WCDMA and 2G radio
node sites that use transmission sharing.

2.5.17 FAJ 121 940: AAL2 path with UBR


The Iub transmission efficiency increases with the use of AAL2 path over
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) for best-effort traffic. Delay-sensitive traffic still uses
AAL2 path over Constant Bit Rate (CBR).

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Configuration.

2.5.18 FAJ 121 962: Robust Transport Configuration


The feature simplifies the Node B connections to RNC modules and increase their
robustness. Operating Expenditure (OPEX) is therefore reduced. The selection of
the RNC module to which attach an RBS is automatic. The new and reconfigured
Nodes B are distributed evenly within the extension subrack.

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Configuration and ATM
Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.19 FAJ 121 963: DL Flow Control for PS interactive/background on DCH


When using the DCH best-effort configuration option, as described in FAJ 121
132, this feature increases the Iub transmission efficiency, where the data rate
on affected flows is temporarily reduced upon detection of overload on Iub. The
feature is configurable for interactive/background PS RABs on DCH.

This feature is licensed and requires activation.

2.5.20 FAJ 121 964: IP Interfaces in RAN


This feature covers the functions and characteristics of the IP transmission line
interface boards, also referred to as Exchange Terminal Boards (ETBs), for RNC
and Node B.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Configuration.

2.5.21 FAJ 121 966: Configurable Transport Bearer QoS Class


The configuration of QoS class for transport bearers for both ATM and IP
transport links is flexible and depends on operator needs.

54 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Input parameters for Iu come from Radio Access Network Application Part
(RANAP) and for Iur/Iub from radio network layer. Output parameters control
the AAL2 QoS class for ATM transport and DiffServe CodePoints for IP and Pbits
for Ethernet.

The effect of the QoS class change is immediate for connections established after
the parameter change, without any disturbance caused by the change, within the
principles of the different QoS classes.

This feature is licensed and requires activation. For information about how to
activate and deactivate, refer to QoS Configuration.

2.5.22 FAJ 121 973: SS7 over IP


The feature (often referred to as SIGTRAN) provides the possibility to transport
SS7 signalling over IP, based on the MTP3 User Adaptation Layer (M3UA) and
Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) solution. The interfaces required is
Gigabit Ethernet interface board, same as used for the feature IuPS user plane
over IP. The concerned application protocols are RANAP, Radio Network System
Application Part (RNSAP), and Q.2630.2. All these three protocols are unaffected;
it is only the lower protocol layers that are affected. The feature requires the HW,
Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Interface.

This feature was enhanced for W17.Q2. release with improved handling of the
“Remote IP Address Unreachable” alarm.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.23 FAJ 121 976: IuPS User Plane Over IP


This feature enables IP over Ethernet to be used as an alternative to ATM for
connecting the user plane between RNC and SGSN. The feature requires the HW,
Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Interface.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.24 FAJ 121 1086: IMA Bandwidth Adaptation


The IMA Bandwidth Adaptation feature at physical link failure (for instance
loss of 1 x E1) allows the best effort traffic capacity to adapt to the reduced
transmission capacity, while the strict QoS traffic with bandwidth reservation (for
instance voice) keeps the guaranteed fixed bandwidth resource.

For more information, see Inverse Multiplexing over ATM.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 55


Basic Features

2.5.25 FAJ 121 1098: Iub Optimization


The packet transport functionality in the end-point nodes (Node B and RNC), and
in the aggregation nodes (Hub-RBSs), provides advanced traffic management
like QoS handling and admission control, to achieve optimal efficiency over the
Iub backhaul.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.26 FAJ 121 1109: Ethernet Aggregation Switching


This feature enables the use of an L2 Ethernet switch integrated in the Multi
Function Ethernet Interface and the Multi Function Interface in Node B. It can
be used for interconnection of site equipment, or to aggregate IP/Ethernet traffic
into a common Ethernet transport link. The Multi Function Ethernet Interface
is supported in both RNC and radio node sites but this feature is applicable
only to radio nodes, since the RNC uses the available ports for internal node
interconnections.

This feature requires Multi Function Ethernet Interface board.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.27 FAJ 121 1118: Iub over IP/Ethernet in RNC


This feature enables IP over Ethernet to be used as an alternative to ATM for
connecting the Iur user plane between two RNCs. This enables one common IP/
Ethernet transport service for the RNC backbone transport including signalling
(SIGTRAN) as well as IuPS, IuCS, and Iur user plane traffic, without any ATM or
pseudowire technology.

This feature requires Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Interface board.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.28 FAJ 121 1119: IuCS User Traffic over IP


This feature enables IP over Ethernet to be used as an alternative to ATM for
connecting the user plane between RNC and MGW. This enables one common
IP/Ethernet transport service for the backbone transport including signalling
(SIGTRAN) as well as IuPS, IuCS and Iur user plane traffic without any ATM or
pseudowire technology.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

56 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.5.29 FAJ 121 1120: Iur User Traffic over IP


This feature enables the use of an L2 Ethernet switch integrated in the Multi
Function Ethernet Interface and the Multi Function Interface in Node B. The
function can be used for interconnection of site equipment, or to aggregate
IP/Ethernet traffic into a common Ethernet transport link. The Multi Function
Ethernet Interface is supported in both RNC and radio node sites, but this feature
is only applicable in the radio node, since the RNC uses the available ports for
internal node interconnections.

This feature requires Multi Function Ethernet Interface (see FAJ 121 964, IP
Interfaces in RAN, for details).

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.30 FAJ 121 1132: Iub over IP/Ethernet in RBS


For the Node B, this feature enables the IP/Ethernet transport for Iub, as an
alternative to ATM over PDH/SDH.

This feature requires the Multifunctional Ethernet Transmission Interface board.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.31 FAJ 121 1154: Network Synch Server for IP Transport


This feature enables network synchronization for an IP-only connected radio
node and provides the Synch Server part of the function in RNC. The Network
Synch Client part needs to be implemented in the Node B to be able to lock the
Node B radio frequency according to 3GPP specification.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

— FAJ 121 1132: Iub over IP Transport in RBS

— FAJ 121 1155: Network Synch Client for IP Transport

This feature requires the Multifunctional Ethernet Transmission Interface board.

For more information, refer to Synchronization.

2.5.32 FAJ 121 1155: Network Synch Client for IP Transport


This feature enables network synchronization for an IP-only connected radio
node. It provides the Synch Server part of the function in RNC. This feature
requires the Network Synch Client part to be implemented in the Node B to be
able to lock the Node B radio frequency according to 3GPP specification.

This feature requires the following optional RAN features:

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 57


Basic Features

— FAJ 121 1132: Iub over IP Transport in RBS

— FAJ 121 1154: Network Synch Server for IP Transport

This feature requires the Multifunctional Ethernet Transmission Interface board


in Node B.

For more information, refer to Synchronization.

2.5.33 FAJ 121 1221: ATM and IP Dual Stack in RNC


With this feature, a combination of ATM and IP transport on all interfaces in RNC
is possible.

HW for transmission interfaces is required, see FAJ 121 368: ATM Interfaces in
RAN, and FAJ 121 964: IP interfaces in RAN.

The following optional features are required to support the IP transport


functionality in RNC:

— FAJ 121 973: SS7 over IP

— FAJ 121 976: Iu-PS User Plane over IP

For more information, refer to ATM Transport Network Configuration.

2.5.34 FAJ 121 1292: 3G Direct Tunnel


The feature 3G Direct Tunnel enables a split between the control plane and user
plane toward the packet CNs. This means that the user plane does not require to
be connected to the SGSN, and can be connected directly to the Gateway GPRS
Support Node (GGSN) instead.

2.5.35 FAJ 121 1311: ATM and IP Dual Stack in RBS


This feature enables having a combination of ATM and IP transport for Iub in
a Node B. It enables using IP transport with lower quality than when using Iub
over native IP only.

This feature requires activation of the following RAN features:

— FAJ 121 1132: Iub over IP Transport in RBS

— FAJ 121 966: Configurable Transport Bearer QoS Class

— FAJ 121 1221: ATM & IP Dual Stack in RNC

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Configuration.

58 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.5.36 FAJ 121 1327: Unified ATM/IP Admission Control for Iub
The Unified ATM/IP Admission Control for Iub allows the operators to configure
a limit for each Iub on the bandwidth available for guaranteed bit rate services.
The Iub limit control is needed to prevent overloading of bandwidth-limited IP
transport links and prevent bad quality on the guaranteed bit rate services.

The bandwidth limit for each Iub can be configured separately for UL and DL
and applies to both IP and ATM transport links. This feature also includes user-
defined thresholds to control the amount of Iub GBR Bandwidth resources to be
reserved for the mobility of connections.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Configuration, ATM


Transport Network Configuration, IP Transport Network Functionality, ATM
Transport Network Functionality, Capacity Management, and Transport Network
Performance Monitoring.

2.5.37 FAJ 121 1408: Mub Port Integration


This feature removes the need for the O&M cable used in IP Node B for Mub
traffic. When this feature is introduced, O&M traffic is carried through backplane
directly to ET-MFX board instead.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Configuration.

2.5.38 FAJ 121 1461: Common Iub IP Host in RBS


With this feature, using the same IP host for Iub control plane and Iub user plane
is possible. A radio nodeneeds only one IP address for Iub when this feature is
introduced.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Configuration.

2.5.39 FAJ 121 1554: Absolute Time Synch


This features makes it possible for several independent Digital Units (of different
Radio Technologies) to synchronously provide identical frame number (Base
station Frame Number). This is based on absolute time information from a
physical GPS receiver or from network sync.

Absolute Time Synch is a prerequisite feature for the FAJ 121 1553: Mixed Mode
in Multi Standard RBS, (WCDMA). The mixed mode feature is dependent in the
way that two radio standard nodes use the same Frame Number (Base station
frame number) value synchronously towards the shared RUS.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 59


Basic Features

2.5.40 FAJ 121 1599: SRB on HS TN resource booking optimization


This feature introduces the SRB on HS TN resource booking optimization and
it gives the operator the possibility to reduce the transport network (TN)
bandwidth reservation for the Signalling Radio Bearer (SRB) on HS (uplink
with SRB on EUL with 10/2 ms and down link with SRB on HSDPA with 2
ms TTI). This feature reduces the bandwidth reservation for SRB, increasing
the accessibility for GBR users like voice when the amount of EUL and SRB on
HSDPA capable terminals is growing.

For more information, refer to IP Transport Network Functionality.

2.5.41 FAJ 121 3247: Mub Routing in EvoC 8200/RNC


In the Evo Controller 8200/RNC equipped with EvoET boards, Mub traffic can
be routed in two ways: at the IP layer and forwarded over ATM (IP/AAL5) to
Ethernet (IP/Ethernet) interfaces. IP interfaces and static routes are configured
in the Managed Object Model (MOM) using existing Managed Objects (MOs).
Mur is configured on an Ethernet interface and Mub traffic is forwarded on this
interface.

The AAL5 Cross Connects can be set up by creating one Aal5CrossConnect MO


for each Mub. To the Aal5CrossConnect, the Aal5TpVccTp for the O&M Router
and Node B side are connected by setting the aal5TpVccTpRef attributes for
both sides.

The aim of this feature is to use the functionality for Mub traffic only (AAL5).
From the operator perspective, this functionality looks the same as ATM Cross
Connects.

For more information, refer to Mub Routing in EvoC 8200/RNC.

2.5.42 FAJ 121 3522: IP Optimized HSDPA TN Settings


This feature optimizes the setting of HSDPA flow control to improve the
performance of IP-based Iub transport links. The end-user throughput can be
increased by 30%.

For more information, refer to IP Optimized HSDPA TN Settings.

2.5.43 FAJ 121 3652: Bidirectional Forwarding Detection


Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) is a network protocol for CAX HW in
the RNC. It provides low overhead detection of faults between two forwarding
engines connected by a link. Only single-hop BFD is provided, that is, the BFD can
supervise routers connected on the same L2 network.

The BFD feature is supported on CAX in RNC and it is used to supervise the link
between CAX and the site router.

60 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For more information, refer to Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.

2.5.44 FAJ 121 3955: IP Static Routing in RNC


The feature enables the forwarding of IP packets between IP networks on IP
routers. Forwarding is based on a routing table configured on the CAX. The
routing table contains a number of static routes to next hops used for forwarding
decisions.

The peer router provides redundancy by using the Virtual Router Redundancy
Protocol (VRRP) or a similar protocol between internal IP routers. The IP route
supervision provides supervision of external routes that is used to select the best
outgoing path.

For more information, refer to IP Static Routing in RNC.

2.5.45 FAJ 121 3665: IP Transport


IP Transport enables to generate and receive IP packages in Ethernet frames
instead of ATM cells on PDH or SDH frames. It supports all logical interfaces
in WCDMA RAN: Iub, Iur, IuCS, and IuPS. The signaling uses Stream Control
Transmission Protocol (SCTP) and the user plane uses UDP, except for IuCS
which is using Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP). Using IP Transport for
WCDMA RAN connectivity opens up for Ethernet-based transport that is
cheaper and can support higher throughput than common Plesiochronous
Digital Hierarchy (PDH)-based TDM links. Adding capacity in an Ethernet-based
network is easier than in an ATM over PDH or Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH) network, therefore, this technology is preferable for growing Mobile
Broadband services.

This feature also includes the Network Synchronization functionality required to


provide frequency reference to the base stations, based on NTP with servers in
RNC and clients in the Node B.

For more information about the activation details, refer to Licenses and
Hardware Activation Codes in Ericsson Software Model and see descriptions of
the following features:

— FAJ 121 1132: Iub over IP/Ethernet in RBS, see FAJ 121 1132: Iub over
IP/Ethernet in RBS on page 57

— FAJ 121 973: SS7 over IP, see FAJ 121 973: SS7 over IP on page 55

— FAJ 121 976: IuPS User Plane Over IP, see FAJ 121 976: IuPS User Plane
Over IP on page 55

— FAJ 121 1109: Ethernet Aggregation Switching, see FAJ 121 1109: Ethernet
Aggregation Switching on page 56

— FAJ 121 1155: Network Synch Client for IP Transport, see FAJ 121 1155:
Network Synch Client for IP Transport on page 57

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 61


Basic Features

— FAJ 121 1311: ATM and IP Dual Stack in RBS, see FAJ 121 1311: ATM and
IP Dual Stack in RBS on page 58

— FAJ 121 1327: Unified ATM/IP Admission Control for Iub, see FAJ 121 1327:
Unified ATM/IP Admission Control for Iub on page 59

Note: For each of the listed related features, information on Baseband Radio
Node support is included in Table 1.

2.5.46 FAJ 121 4243: Virtual Routers


The feature enables configuration of multiple virtual routers on one physical IP
router. Each virtual router owns a static routing table and allows the same level
of IP Static Routing, VRRP, and BFD as a single physical IP router.

Traffic cannot be routed between two virtual routers configured on the same
physical router. By configuring virtual routers for different traffic domains on both
of the node internal routers, the operator disables traffic forwarding between
the domains. Redundant traffic path is configured by creating a virtual router for
the same domain on the redundant router. The same VLAN cannot be used on
different virtual routers on the same physical router.

For more information, refer to Virtual Routers.

2.5.47 FAJ 121 4255: Bidirectional Forwarding Detection


BFD provides functionality to monitor IP connectivity to next-hop routers. The
BFD protocol is defined in IETF specification RFC 5880, RFC 5881 and RFC 5882.
The BFD feature is used to monitor IP connectivity to static routing next-hops. It
provides fast detection when connectivity is lost, so that traffic can be rerouted
using alternative paths.

For more information refer to Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.

2.5.48 FAJ 121 4257: Virtual Routers


The main purpose of the Virtual Routers feature is to separate traffic and routing
information between different IP domains such as the O&M and RAN traffic.
Address planning can be done independently for each domain. The feature
enables the configuration of up to eight routers in a node and each virtual router
that forwards traffic has a separate configuration including static routes and
interfaces. The network topology is therefore divided into multiple subnetworks,
one for each virtual router.

For more information, refer to Virtual Routers.

62 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.5.49 FAJ 121 4328: CMPv2


Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2) enables a Node B to enroll
for an X.509 certificate and to register into the operator Public Key Infrastructure
(PKI). It also allows an automatic update of the valid certificate, thus permits
a complete automatic lifecycle management of the X.509 certificates that are
necessary for a node participation in the PKI. The feature brings the following
benefits:

— The 3GPP compliance supports the CMPv2 protocol and uses the vendor
credentials to sign the certificate and requests.

— It is an enabler for the following:

• The OAM security with zero touch certificate enrollment.

• The IP Security (IPsec) with zero touch certificate enrollment.

• The auto integration for Node B on untrusted transport networks using


IPsec.

For more information, refer to CMPv2.

2.5.50 FAJ 121 4376: Access Control Lists


The Access Control Lists (ACL) provides basic traffic filtering capabilities of
incoming and outgoing traffic to the Baseband T. It examines each packet to
determine whether to forward or drop the packet, on the basis of the criteria
specified within the access lists. This makes it possible to block unwanted traffic
and reduced the possibility for an attacker who is seeking to compromise the
Nodes/Mobile system.

The following is supported:

— Both Ingress and Egress traffic filters

— Filters based on 7-tuple:

• Source IP address

• Destination IP address

• Protocol

• Source Port

• Destination port

• ICMP type

• Fragment type

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 63


Basic Features

— Both white list and black list

— One or more ACLs for eachIPv4 interface

— Counters for each ACL and for each rule

The feature protects the nodes against unwanted and malicious traffic. It
provides basic defense against attacks from an outside network, for example,
a leased backhaul network. The feature also ensures that traffic does not enter
the node through an unwanted interface.

For more information, refer to Access Control Lists.

2.5.51 FAJ 121 4411: IP Loopback Interface


The main purpose of the IP Loopback Interface feature is to provide resilient
transport for node internal applications.

The Loopback IP Interface feature provides the possibility for an application to


use one source address for all traffic. This is useful for management purposes, as
it prevents packets being assigned different source addresses depending on the
used port.

When used with multiple transport links, FAJ 121 4255: Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection, and FAJ 121 4412: Static Routing, making a resilient transport
connection to the Baseband Radio Node is possible.

For more information, refer to IP Loopback Interface.

2.5.52 FAJ 121 4412: Static Routing


Static Routing enables transport and routing of IPv4 datagrams in an IPv4
network, enabling the node to function as a router in an IPv4 network. Static
Routing enables the configuration of the routing table that controls the routing of
datagrams toward their destinations.

The forwarding functionality of the Static Routing feature operates according to


IETF specification RFC 1812, for IPv4 router functionality. The host functionality
operates according to IETF specifications RFC 1812 and RFC 1122.

Static Routing supports null routes. This can be used to avoid routing loops that
can occur when a route becomes unavailable.

For more information, refer to Static Routing.

2.5.53 FAJ 121 4413: Ethernet Switching


This feature controls network bridging. Bridging allows two or more
communication networks, or two or more network segments, to create an

64 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

aggregate network. A network bridge is a network device that connects multiple


network segments. Bridge behavior is defined by IEEE 802.1Q.

Ethernet bridging allows operators to save IP addresses. Ethernet bridging also


enables adding new site equipment without impact on the network IP address
planning.

For more information, refer to Ethernet Switching.

2.5.54 FAJ 121 4414: Bridged Virtual Interface


This feature enables the Baseband Radio Node to use an IP address in the
bridged network to terminate some of the traffic and therefore minimize the
number of IP subnets needed at the site. Using FAJ 121 4413: Ethernet
Switching alone does not allow for terminating any of the bridged traffic in the
Baseband Radio Node. For more information, refer to Bridged Virtual Interface.

For more information, refer to Bridged Virtual Interface.

2.5.55 FAJ 121 4550: Port Mirroring


The feature enables mirroring of the egress and ingress flow between any
Ethernet ports. It can be used for troubleshooting of network problems.

For more information, refer to Port Mirroring.

2.5.56 FAJ 121 4563: Synchronous Ethernet for EvoC


With this feature, Evo Controller 8200/RNC R2 supports Synchronous Ethernet
as a synchronization source for the node internal clocking and the NTP-
based Network Synchronization Server. Feature enables synchronization of
the node to the rate of ingress Ethernet signals and enables synchronization
distribution through egress Ethernet interfaces of the node. This allows cascade
synchronization between the nodes. Both synchronization ingress and egress are
supported over Ethernet interfaces on CAX, using ports GE1 - GE3 on CMXB and
A1 - B4 on CCIB.

For more information, refer to Synchronous Ethernet for EvoC.

2.5.57 FAJ 121 4773: Access Control List in RNC


The Access Control List in RNC feature introduces the ingress traffic protection on
the node external IP interfaces. It is achieved by filtering wanted and unwanted
traffic in the IP networks. It is possible to filter packets based on a number of
policies on all network interfaces (Iub, IuPS, IuCS, and so on). Traffic is filtered
by:

— Source IP Address

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 65


Basic Features

— Destination IP Address

In addition, this feature provides the possibility to block traffic from one
operator’s network towards another operator’s network on the same network
interface in a shared access network (shared RAN or RNC).

The feature is applicable for Evo Controller 8200 R2 with Cabinet Aggregation
Switch (CAX).

For more information about this feature and related topics, refer to Access
Control List in RNC.

2.5.58 FAJ 121 4776: Mixed Mode Baseband R503


Mixed Mode Baseband R503 is based on the three-splitter Baseband R503. It
allows two separate MEs to share three splitters within one Baseband R503. Two
MEs can be synchronized through Node Group Synchronization over a shared
Baseband R503.

This feature provides more flexible configuration and hardware-efficient


deployments with Baseband R503. It allows the customer to fully utilize
hardware resources of Baseband R503, and save cost in deployment.

2.5.59 FAJ 121 5281: Multiple IP Addresses on the Same VLAN


This feature allows the network to support up to four IPv4 addresses on the
same VLAN. The addresses must belong to different, non-overlapping subnets.

The IP addresses are configured manually. A primary IP address must be


configured, for when the system must use a single address.

For more information, see Multiple IP Addresses on the Same VLAN.

2.6 RAN Management


Table 2 shows documents related to RAN Management.

66 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Table 2 RAN Management Features

Title Descriptions Target Groups


Flexible PM Statistics Provides an overview of — Configuration Management
Flexible PM Statistics (FAJ (CM)
121 3425) that enables
the definition of PM — Fault Management (FM)
statistics ROP (Recording
Output Period) in addition — Field Repair (FR)
to the default 15-minute
period, to 5-minute or 60- — Network Engineering (NE)
minute operator-controlled
granularity periods for — Network Planning/Design (ND)
RNC counters.
— Network Quality Management
(NQ)

— O&M Management (OMM)

— System Administration (SAD)


QoS Handling Provides an overview of — Configuration Management
the WCDMA RAN Quality (CM)
of Service solution and
how it contributes to a — Fault Management (FM)
total end-to end solution.
The document describes — Field Repair (FR)
briefly how each feature
is involved in the QoS — Network Engineering (NE)
solution.
— Network Planning/Design (ND)

— Network Quality Management


(NQ)

— O&M Management (OMM)

— System Administration (SAD)

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 67


Basic Features

Title Descriptions Target Groups


RBS Soft Lock Describes the RBS — Configuration Management
Soft Lock feature, (CM)
including information on
feature operation and — Fault Management (FM)
dependencies. The feature
gradually reduces the — Network Engineering (NE)
output power of a cell.
During this procedure, the — Network Planning/Design (ND)
ongoing calls in the cell are
maintained but new calls — Network Quality Management
are rejected. (NQ)

— O&M Management (OMM)

— System Administration (SAD)


Shared RAN (MOCN) Describes Shared RAN — Configuration Management
multiple PLMN support (MOCN) multiple PLMN (CM)
support feature, including
information on activation — Fault Management (FM)
and deactivation and
technical description. The — Network Engineering (NE)
feature introduces an
additional functionality — Network Planning/Design (ND)
for the benefit of
User Equipment (UE) — Network Quality Management
supporting Multi Operator (NQ)
Core Networks (MOCNs).
The new functionality — O&M Management (OMM)
is based on the list
of multiple Public Land — System Administration (SAD)
Mobile Network (PLMN)
Identities (IDs) broadcast
in system information in
the RAN coverage area.
Statistical Observability Describes the Statistical — Configuration Management
Observability feature. The (CM)
feature provides many
statistical counters that — Fault Management (FM)
allow the operator to
monitor the traffic and — Network Engineering (NE)
get an overview of the
network performance. — Network Planning/Design (ND)

— Network Quality Management


(NQ)

— O&M Management (OMM)

— System Administration (SAD)

68 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Title Descriptions Target Groups


UE Real-time Trace Describes the UE — Configuration Management
Real-time Trace (UE- (CM)
RTT) feature, including
information on activation — Fault Management (FM)
and deactivation and
technical description. This — Field Repair (FR)
feature provides support
for setting up and — Network Engineering (NE)
scheduling streaming of
UETR events from RNC — Network Planning/Design (ND)
nodes to a user-defined
receiving system including — Network Quality Management
OSS or any external server (NQ)
with its own IP address.
— O&M Management (OMM)

— System Administration (SAD)


WCDMA Flexible Node Describes activation, — Configuration Management
Supervision deactivation and (CM)
configuration of the
WCDMA Flexible Node — Fault Management (FM)
Supervision feature and
its main benefits. This — Field Repair (FR)
feature introduces new
functionality for the — Network Engineering (NE)
operator to activate user-
defined KPI measurements — Network Planning/Design (ND)
directly on an EvoC
8200/RNC node. Also, — Network Quality Management
it defines the desirable (NQ)
threshold values for KPIs
to generate FM alarms — O&M Management (OMM)
when applicable.
— System Administration (SAD)

2.6.1 FAJ 121 101: Accessibility


The management of the RNC node and Node B is performed through graphical
user interfaces implemented in the network Element Manager (EM). Both local
and remote access is possible. The EMs are model-driven, that is, the GUI adapts
to the content of the actual MOM.

2.6.2 FAJ 121 102: Backup


The Backup feature enables creating a copy of all the current node configuration
elements in a WCDMA RAN node, including the current radio and transport
configuration data, equipment, hardware, and software configuration data

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 69


Basic Features

stored and used in the NE. The copied information is called a Configuration
Version (CV).

The Backup feature also provides the functionality to view and delete CVs, to
control which CV to be used automatically in various node restart cases and to
reload the node with an arbitrary CV.

The operator can also save a copy of the CV as a backup on an external File
Transfer Protocol (FTP) server, so that this backup can be used later if this
node has to be restored. When restoring a CV backup from a remote location, a
verification procedure checks that this particular CV can be used in the node.

The Backup feature is accessed from the Element Management Software view.

For more information, refer to Software Backup Administration.

2.6.3 FAJ 121 103: Configuration Management


The Configuration Management feature controls and collects data from and
provides it to NEs. It also controls the links between the NEs. Controlling the
data is facilitated by the graphical user interfaces in the embedded EMs. The file
execution function in the NEs facilitates the configuration of the lower levels.

For more information about NE configuration, refer to Radio Network


Configuration.

2.6.4 FAJ 121 104: Fault Management


The Fault Management feature includes functions for supervision, test, and alarm
handling of the WCDMA RAN. Faulty equipment is detected by either supervision
functions or self-tests of network equipment. The operator is notified about the
fault and automatic actions are taken by the system to minimize the effect of the
fault. The notification and the associated documentation guide the users when
correcting the faults.

Alarm notifications from the NE are only distributed through the OSS product. No
direct interface to the network nodes (Node B, RNC) is available.

For more information, refer to Fault Management.

2.6.5 FAJ 121 105: Performance Management


The Performance Management feature allows an operator to monitor traffic
behavior in a network. The Performance Statistics feature enables an overview of
the status of a network, whereas the Performance Recordings feature enables
analyzing traffic situations on a detailed level. The Performance Recording
is therefore suitable for troubleshooting, optimization, and tuning a network.
Performance Management requires OSS for data collection of PM statistics and
PM recordings.

70 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Statistical Observability, FAJ 121 409 and Recording Observability for General
Performance Event Handling, FAJ 121 1001 are included in separate feature
descriptions, see FAJ 121 409: Statistical Observability on page 73 and FAJ 121
1001: Recording Observability for General Performance Event Handling on page
73.

For additional information, refer to Performance Management in WCDMA.

2.6.6 FAJ 121 106: Product Inventory


The Product Inventory feature provides information regarding a node and the
HW and SW it contains.

2.6.7 FAJ 121 107: Security Management


The features in the security solution are as follows:

— Single logon functionality, only one logon procedure to access the WCDMA
RAN and OSS

— Firewall and router configuration rules

— Secure protocols

— Audit trail log

— User authentication and authorization

— Application Server (AS)

— FAJ 121 4163: Real Time Security Event Logging.

— Idle session time-out configuration

The FAJ 121 107: Security Management feature gives the possibility to activate
the Security Level 3 (SL3) in the WCDMA nodes. It is turned on by default and
takes effect once the node is configured to SL3. By activating SL3, the security
state of the node is improved in terms of the following aspects:

— Automatic deactivation of unsecured protocols such as FTP or Telnet and


activation of Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) and Secure Shell (SSH).

— Individual accounts and central authentication for O&M users accessing the
node over SFTP or SSH.

— Activation of Access Control for access to COLI commands and File System
(paths and files) based on predefined task profiles. Only users with proper
authorization are permitted to operate on certain COLI commands and
certain parts of the File System.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 71


Basic Features

— Basic protection of MOM access based on predefined task profiles.

— More detailed Security Logging.

The Security Management feature also supports the following functions related
to cipher suites:

— Cipher suite using Rivest-Shamir-Aldeman algorithm (RSA) with 2048-bit


keys for the node credentials, trusted certificates, and SSH server keys. By
updating the ciphering suite with support for 2048-bit keys, the security state
of the WCDMA nodes is improved.

— Configurability of cipher suites for encryption, integrity, and authentication


during connection setup through SSH and TLS.

In addition, the feature supports the certificate revocation status check and idle
session time-out configuration. The certificate revocation status check function
can be activated or deactivated by setting a parameter on the Node B and RNC.
The idle session time-out can be configured through relevant parameter or COLI
command on the Node B and RNC depending on the protocol type, which the
session uses.

For more information, refer to System Description, Security Management and


Security for O&M Node Access.

2.6.8 FAJ 121 108: Software Management


All new and changed software is collected in an Upgrade Package (UP). The
Software Management feature allows the operator to install an UP on a NE and
then upgrade the NE with the new UP.

Remote and parallel software installation and upgrade option is provided with
the OSS product such as ENM.

For more information, refer to Software Management.

2.6.9 FAJ 121 110: Site LAN


A special extension of the O&M Intranet is provided at a radio node site, the
Site-LAN. The Site LAN feature allows the operator to connect any External
Auxiliary Units (EAU), for example a diesel generator, battery backup, mini-links,
or any other equipment that is connected to the Site LAN, as long as the EAU
provides an IP connection for the management purpose to the O&M Intranet.
The Site LAN feature, together with the O&M Intranet, provides the connection
between a terminal and the node, both locally and remotely.

For more information, refer to IP Infrastructure for O&M.

72 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.6.10 FAJ 121 111: Documentation


The documentation, Customer Product Information (CPI), helps and guides the
user to manage the WCDMA RAN system.

For more information on CPI, refer to How to Use the CPI Library.

2.6.11 FAJ 121 409: Statistical Observability


The Statistical Observability feature provides statistical counters that allow the
operator to monitor the traffic situation and get an overview of the network
performance. The counter information is an important base for network planning,
and tuning.

For general information about performance statistics, refer to Perfomance


Management in WCDMA. For more details, refer to Statistical Observability and
Radio Network KPI.

2.6.12 FAJ 121 514: Radio Environment Statistics


The Radio Environment Statistics feature gives the possibility to perform
statistical measurements on the radio environment. The measurements can be
configured in a flexible manner, for instance different quantities can be measured
for different service, and measurements can be performed on both the UL and the
DL. The results are collected in statistical distribution counters for each cell. DL
measurements are made by ordering terminals to initiate periodic measurements
and to send the results to the RNC.

The Radio Environment Statistics feature allows the operator to get better
information about the radio environment in the network. Areas or cells with poor
radio condition can be discovered and troubleshooting can be simplified.

For more information, see Performance Management in WCDMA.

2.6.13 FAJ 121 1001: Recording Observability for General Performance Event
Handling
To monitor, tune, and troubleshoot a mobile radio network, various
measurements and data recording reflecting details surrounding system behavior
have to be collected. Apart from the daily collection of PM Statistics data
(counter data), PM Recording Observability for General Performance Event
Handling (event data) is an important component of the network performance
evaluation. Event information is useful when troubleshooting a network. This
feature provides a large set of events that can be used to log the traffic in RAN,
and monitor both the RNC node or Node B internal processes, as well as the
external signalling interfaces.

For more information, refer to Performance Management in WCDMA.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 73


Basic Features

2.6.14 FAJ 121 1003: Configurable Priority of Neighbor Cell Relations


A specific priority attribute is added for neighbor cell configuration, enabling the
operator to set and read the neighbor cell priority without the need to delete and
reinsert the complete neighbor cell list.

For more information, refer to Neighboring Cell Support.

2.6.15 FAJ 121 1089: Drifting RNC Observability


The Drifting RNC Observability feature gives the possibility to include
information from mobiles connected to drifting RNC in the cell-related
measurements.

This feature is licensed and requires activation. For more information, refer to
Performance Management in WCDMA.

2.6.16 FAJ 121 1123: RBS Soft Lock


With the RBS Soft Lock feature, the end-user traffic disturbances can be
minimized when taking a DU Radio Node or a cell out of operation.

For more information, refer to RBS Soft Lock.

2.6.17 FAJ 121 1156: Release Locked Mobiles when IuCS is Down
This feature disables the cells connected to an RNC that has no contact with an
MSC. Terminals camping on WCDMA lose its connection to the WCDMA network
and automatically establish a new connection to a GSM system if available.

This feature is licensed and requires activation.

2.6.18 FAJ 121 1173: Support for AISG RET Antenna


This feature allows Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) antennas compliant with the
3GPP Iuant or AISG interface to be supported through Ericsson RAN.

Remote antenna tilt means that fewer site visits and mast climbs are required.
Remote control and supervision of antenna systems make optimization more
effective.

Detection of Antenna Line Devices (ALDs) through AISG 2.0 device scan is
supported in DU and Baseband Radio Node. The result after the device scan
is a list of Unique IDs found. Device scan also triggers a readout of device data.
The summary of information enables configuring the antenna system in the
MOM. This table information simplifies and reduces mistakes during the antenna
configuration.

74 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

The operator interface is aligned between DU and Baseband products. Device


scan procedure is available through performFullAntennaDeviceScan action
under EquipmentDiscovery MO in both products.

The following enhancements are introduced in Baseband Radio Node:

— Periodical device scans in the background to discover all newly connected


ALDs. A new attribute antennaDeviceScanInBackground is added to MO
EquipmentDiscovery. The time for site visits is reduced because the
operator has a clearer view of the connected TMAs and RETs.

— DC output only on RET port, that means on RF port R. A new attribute,


portConfiguration, required by performFullAntennaDeviceScan is
added to support this enhancement.

— AISG 3.0 connection support with legacy procedures support. Supported


revision of standard is 3.0.2.

— Support for AISG 3.0 device scan.

2.6.19 FAJ 121 1242: Support for AISG and CWA TMAs
This feature allows Tower Mounted Amplifiers (TMAs) complying with the AISG
2.0/3GPP specification and Current Window Alarm TMAs to be supported.
Baseband Radio Nodes only support AISG 2.0 TMAs.

2.6.20 FAJ 121 1369: RBS Auto Provisioning


This feature helps to simplify the provisioning of radio node in WCDMA RAN,
by reducing the on-site work and the need for coordination with the Operation
and Maintenance Center (OMC). This shortens the site integration and overall
provisioning time. RBS Auto Provisioning can be used for all types of radio nodes,
with preference to IP-RBS. For ATM RBS, the initial radio node configuration files
must be locally entered.

For more information, refer to RBS Auto Provisioning.

2.6.21 FAJ 121 1462: Cascading of AISG RET Antenna


This feature enables the series connection of several RET units in one sector that
is one RET daisy chain for each ASC/TMA/RIU.

2.6.22 FAJ 121 1463: Robust Reconfiguration Using Rollback


This feature introduces the possibility to protect a node (typically Node B ) from
mistakes leading to lost O&M communication. The protection using rollback is
relevant for remote reconfiguration related to transmission links carrying the

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 75


Basic Features

O&M traffic. This type of protection is relevant for both ATM based and IP based
transmission.

2.6.23 FAJ 121 1501: RNC Adaptive UE Allocation on Special Processor (SP)
This feature enables higher bit rates for evolved HS UE even in the high
traffic load conditions. The user is allowed to set a priority for UE with no
HS capability, basic HS capability, MIMO/64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
(QAM) capability, Multi Carrier capability, and Multicarrier 3-6 Carriers capability.
The SP selection is based on the configured priority and on the SPs use level.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling.

2.6.24 FAJ 121 1505: Core Network Supervision


This feature supervises the rate of received RANAP “Reset Resource” messages
from CN nodes. If it exceeds a specific threshold, the RNC sends a Fault
Management (FM) event notification Ranap_CNInitiatedResetResource to alert
the operator about a potential CN problem.

The threshold values for RANAP reset resource message rate are configurable
parameters in the MOM.

The operator must activate the feature by setting the Ranap MO parameters:
ranapResetResourceMonitorThresh to value 200 (recommended value) and
ranapResetResourceMonitorPeriod to value 60s (recommended value). The
recommended values settings apply for all types of CN nodes.

2.6.25 FAJ 121 2576: Cross-Sector Antenna Sharing Redundancy


The Cross-Sector Antenna Sharing Redundancy feature introduces the
redundancy in configurations with dual TX RRUs used in a multi-sector site.
Cross-connections of the antenna feeders between the RRUs and the antennas
prevent a single point of failure, such as a faulty RRU, from causing the entire
sector to be lost.

For more information, refer to Cross-Sector Antenna Sharing Redundancy.

2.6.26 FAJ 121 2710: MultiRAB Observability


This feature provides new counters that enhance the supervision of accessibility
and retainability of RABs in multi-RAB calls. It gives more information about the
following:

— RAB drops on the UtranCell level, UeRc drops on the RNC level and multi-
RAB aspects of Cell Update.

76 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Speech Accessibility in multi-RAB calls in RAB Establishments and Network


Access Server (NAS) signalling areas.

The robust MultiRAB Observability counter handling provides a robust solution


for pegging the RAB release counters. The mechanism stores the release cause
for each RAB individually and pegs the RAB release counters accordingly.
Therefore, the accuracy of the retainability KPIs is improved for both single-RAB
and multi-RAB configurations.

The CS Accessibility introduces PM counters (on the UtranCell level) that allows
the operator to calculate a total speech accessibility for all four states (Idle,
URA_PCH, CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH). Observability for RAB Establishments and
NAS signalling is improved.

For more information, refer to MultiRAB Observability.

2.6.27 FAJ 121 4331: CPRI Link Observability


This feature introduces the following content to better monitor, isolate and
troubleshoot specific components affecting Common Public Radio Interface
(CPRI) performance:

— New Performance Monitoring (PM) counters for CPRI link

— Improved fault handling of CPRI link

— Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) information available in MOM

For more information, refer to CPRI Link Observability.

2.6.28 FAJ 121 4579: Energy Metering


This feature increases observability of energy consumption by introducing energy
measurement. Measurement can be performed in any Node B configuration,
where the HW is able to perform energy metering, for example EMU or HE-PSU
are included.

The system supports a total of 150 active EnergyMeter MO instances:

— Up to 100 instances can be automatically enabled on e-fuses, EMUs, PDUs,


and PSUs

— Up to 50 instances can be automatically enabled on radio units

The enhancement to the feature allows the operator to extend the limits and
manually enable additional EnergyMeter MOs, as long as the total number of
active MO instances does not exceed 150.

For more information, refer to Performance Management in WCDMA.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 77


Basic Features

2.6.29 FAJ 121 4764: Optimized Antenna Selection


The Optimized Antenna Selection feature monitors the status of antenna
connections, detects antenna-related faults, and raises alarms for suspected
faulty antenna branches.

For more information, refer to Optimized Antenna Selection.

2.6.30 FAJ 121 4791: WCDMA Flexible Node Supervision


The WCDMA Flexible Node Supervision feature provides a way of monitoring
WCDMA network performance by calculating KPI values directly on the RNC. The
feature is supported only on Evo Controller 8200/RNC.

The feature allows the operator to:


— Create a KPI profile on the RNC node.

— Enable or disable the KPI value calculation for 5, 15 or 60 minutes.

— Define an upper and lower threshold for the KPI range.

For examples of KPI formulas and additional information, refer to WCDMA


Flexible Node Supervision.

2.6.31 FAJ 121 4799: Simplified Radio Hardware Conformance Testing


This feature enables the operator to perform the WCDMA conformance testing
without the installation of an RNC-sim. It also enables conformance testing
on secure boards. For more information, refer to Simplified Radio Hardware
Conformance Testing.

2.6.32 FAJ 121 4874: Anonymized Event Data

The feature encrypts the IMSI, IMEI, IMEISV, IP and MSISDN identifiers, so
that they cannot be used to identify individual end-users.

The data that is stored or extracted from RNC may expose personal information,
such as IMSI, IMEI(SV), MSISDN or IP addresses of the user terminals, which
can be further used to connect the collected data about the terminal's location,
network activity, call history or content of communication, with individual
subscribers.

Anonymized Event Data modifies data collection and extraction functions, by


anonymizing the sensitive identifiers, before the data is extracted from RNC.
The anonymization removes the identification properties from the identifiers. The
modified identifiers cannot be used to identify individual end-users.Traffic data is
unaffected.

78 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Benefits of the feature:


— Sensitive user data contained in the identifiers cannot be accessed, unless
the feature is disabled.

— The solution enables secure use of features that collect and process personal
data, such as the Remote Drive Test.

— No personal data is gathered if not specifically needed.

— RNC troubleshooting data can be safely passed to third parties, without the
need of additional processing. This can simplify the process and reduce the
cost of data handling.

For more information, refer to Anonymized Event Data.

2.6.33 FAJ 121 4418: Signed Software

The feature prevents unwanted modifications to the software being loaded


to the node.

Signature Validation Service (SVS) verifies the authenticity of the software


signature on the Load Modules. It ensures that the software running on the node
is approved by Ericsson and no third-party tampers with it. These signatures are
validated on the node at upgrade and at node start or restart. The validation is
based on certificates deployed in the firmware of the node. For more information
on activating SVS, see Enabling Signature Validation Service.

Signature Validation Service in WRBS


Signature verification is implemented for RBS nodes.

Signature Validation Service in Evo Controller 8200/RNC


The enhancement introduces signature validation in Evo Controller 8200/RNC.

2.6.34 FAJ 121 4941: Support for AISG RAE

The feature adds support for remote control and monitoring capabilities
that have been added to the Antenna Line Devices (ALD) standard
published by the Antenna Interface Standards Group (AISG).

Remote Antenna Extension (RAE) is a subsidiary module that enables to retrieve


the following parameters about the ALD remotely:
— altitude

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 79


Basic Features

— latitude

— longitude

— downtilt

— azimuth

— roll

The parameters are retrieved from the antenna and can be used to validate that
the radio is configured with the right weighting factor to form the desired beam
pattern. The use of wrong weighting factors creates false beam pattern, which
results in network performance degradation.

The RAE can upload the collected information to ENM.

From W20.Q4 and ENM 20.4 and later, AISG RAE version 2.2.0 is supported, and
the ASD and GLS subunits are introduced.

Functions for geographic location information and antenna observability are


extended to the ASD and GLS subunits. The ASD and GLS subunits allow for
benchmarking these parameters, and provide geographic location information of
the ALD.

2.6.35 FAJ 121 5297: Site Diagnostics

Site Diagnostics is an O&M solution, combined of a number of features and


applications. The main purpose of the Site Diagnostics is to support users in
diagnostics activities that are performed on-site and off-site.

The Site Diagnostics aims to support various aspects of the deployment and
maintenance activities. Depending on the use case, tasks such as validation,
troubleshooting, or KPI and alarm handling, are made more effective and
easier to handle by the introduced software features and user interaction
improvements.

When hardware unit or Baseband unit is replaced or reconfigured, the


information about the new or reconfigured hardware unit is recorded in the
Hardware Inventory History Log.

With the log, operators can easily track the history of hardware replacement and
reconfiguration.

80 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.6.36 FAJ 121 5338: Efficient Fault Management

The feature supports users in efficient fault management and problem


troubleshooting.

The Efficient Fault Management feature allows minimizing the time and effort
needed to identify and troubleshoot a problem.

Less competence and intervention effort can be involved thanks to accurate and
relevant fault indication.

For more information, refer to Efficient Fault Management.

2.6.37 FAJ 121 5339: In-Service Performance Excellence

The feature supports achieving a constantly available and fully capable


network in terms of both capacity and end-user service experience.

The In-Service Performance Excellence feature allows achieving high service


availability with minimized human involvement.

For more information, refer to In-Service Performance Excellence.

2.6.38 FAJ 121 5381: 4TX Support for One WCDMA Carrier

4TX is supported for WCDMA in both single mode and mixed mode radio
configuration. With this feature activated, one sector can only support one
WCDMA carrier.

This feature provides the following benefits:


— The CAPEX and OPEX are reduced because of flexible network deployment.

— In W+L mixed mode radio configuration, the network performance of LTE or


WCDMA can be improved as more available power can be allocated.

For more information, refer to 4TX Support for One WCDMA Carrier.

2.6.39 FAJ 121 5330: Support for AISG ADB


The Support for AISG ADB feature adds function support for the ADB subunit
and enables integration of the unit into the network. The ADB subunit allows
data collection related to antenna arrays.

For more information, see Support for AISG ADB.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 81


Basic Features

2.7 Licensing
This section describes Basic Features for Licensing Principles.

2.7.1 FAJ 121 437: License Control


License control, also called SW keys, is connected with the right to use the
contracted license. The feature controls the use of capacity in the Nodes B and
enables having different capacity in the UL compared to the DL.

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model.

2.7.2 FAJ 121 1009: Delayed Activation of Capacity Control


For DU Radio Node, this feature enables a grace period between the first time
the license capacity level is exceeded and the time that a hard capacity limit is
introduced.

For Baseband Radio Node, the feature Delayed Activation of Capacity Control is
supported without a license and requires no activation.

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model.

2.7.3 FAJ 121 1051: License Control of Functionality


The feature is used to control the activation of features.

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model.

2.7.4 FAJ 121 1226: Emergency Unlock


This feature allows the node capacity and features to be unlocked temporarily
in case of an emergency situation. During the capacity unlock, all the available
capacity of the node can be used, for instance all CEs of a Node B.

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model.

2.7.5 FAJ 121 1321: RNC Capacity License Control


The feature is used to control the use of capacity in the RNC, according to the
capacity license.

82 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model.

2.7.6 FAJ 121 1831: Delayed Activation of Capacity Control RNC


This feature enables a grace period between the first time the license capacity
level is exceeded and the time that a hard capacity limit is introduced.

For more information, refer to Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in


Ericsson Software Model.

2.8 FAJ 121 2636: System Improvements in WRAN W13


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W13 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 3 Node Support for FAJ 121 2636: System Improvements in WRAN W13
Release
System Improvement RNC DU Radio Node Baseband
Radio Node
RBS Power Blossoming N/A X X
Configurable System Antenna N/A X N/A
Voltage 12/17/30
Iur Retainablity X N/A N/A
Joint Support for 4wRX and N/A X N/A
DC-HSDPA in a Node
Low Rate DCH User X N/A N/A
Admission
O&M Capacity Improvement X N/A N/A
Universal Radio Building N/A X N/A
Block Handling Improvement
License Mismatch X X N/A
Improvement
RBS 6000 MMI Improvement, N/A X N/A
LED and Maintenance Button
for the RU
WCDMA Configurations for N/A X N/A
DUW41/31/11

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 83


Basic Features

System Improvement RNC DU Radio Node Baseband


Radio Node
AIR as One Unit N/A X N/A
Mixed Mode Support for AIR N/A X N/A
Products
Cascading of MSMM RRUS N/A X N/A
and SM R(RUS)
MMI Improvement N/A X N/A
Link Adaptation N/A X N/A
Improvements for HSDPA
Increased Connectivity of X N/A N/A
Iub Links for Evo Controller
8200/RNC
Additional UE Capability X N/A N/A
Handling
Speed Up Handling of X N/A N/A
Incoming Relocations
Extended Dynamic Range N/A X N/A
Reduction of 2 ms TTI X N/A N/A
Control Channel Overhead
Improved EUL 10 ms TTI X N/A N/A
Coverage
Improved Grant Rotation N/A X N/A
Improved SNM Robustness X N/A N/A
Heterogeneous Networks N/A X N/A
SCTP Zero Window X X N/A
Supervision
Start of DL Physical Channel N/A X N/A
DPCCH in RBS
SW support for RUS 01 and N/A X N/A
RRUS 01 B0 for WCDMA and
MSMM GSM+WCDMA
Micro RRUS Support N/A X N/A
WIC 8030 Wi-Fi Controller (1)
X N/A N/A
(1) Not supported from W16

2.8.1 RBS Power Blossoming


Power Blossoming improves the robustness of cell setup, resulting in reduced
disturbances in surrounding cells. With power blossoming, power ramping starts

84 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

after all common channels are set up, that is, when the cell is ready for traffic.
Furthermore, ramping is performed with a lower rate than in the legacy function.

2.8.2 Configurable System Antenna Voltage 12/17/30


This feature makes it possible to configure DC voltage to +12 V, +17 V or +30 V
for antenna system configurations where the system itself cannot determine the
DC voltage to be used.

This improvement is supported for DUW based RBSs. Observe that +12 V DC is
only supported on R-RUS 2/12.

2.8.3 Iur Retainability


Iur retainability is improved by initiating radio link removal or HS cell change
instead of call release in the following scenarios:

— If there is another available radio link under the Serving RNC when the
Serving RNC (from Ericsson) receives an indication of Uplink Synchronization
failure over Iur from another vendor's Drift RNC.

— If there is another available radio link set when the Serving RNC receives
Radio Link Failure with cause different from Synchronization failure and the
radio link set is out of sync.

2.8.4 Joint support for 4wRX and DC-HSDPA in a Node


This feature will introduce support for DC-HSDPA and 4wRx diversity on the
same DUW. This is achieved by the ability to configure the RBB24_1A in a more
flexible way. For each sector, 1-4 carriers with 1-2 TX and 2 or 4 RX can be
selected

2.8.5 Low Rate DCH User Admission


In earlier release it is possible for the operator to configure the maximum number
of PS Interactive radio links per cell that use the bitrates 64kbps, 128kbps
and 384kbps. This configuration is possible separately for uplink and downlink.
This improvement makes it possible for the operator to limit the number of PS
Interactive radio links using 16kbps.

Please see Capacity Management for more details.

2.8.6 O&M Capacity Improvement


The legacy Java Virtual Machine SW component is replaced with a more
powerful SW component. This is expected to off-load the O&M MP and generally
improve O&M capacity. External O&M interfaces will remain fully backwards

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 85


Basic Features

compatible. The new SW component consumes slightly more memory than the
legacy Java Virtual Machine SW component. Therefore, it is recommended that
RNC 3810 should have no more than 100 000 MOs in order to not degrade the
O&M performance.

2.8.7 Universal Radio Building Block Handling Improvement


This system improvement introduces a simplified way to configure a sector on
Multi Standard Mixed Mode (MSMM) radio without reconfiguring it with another
RBB. With this change it is possible to configure the RBS with an RBB that
supports MSMM but initially only activate one standard. This simplifies roll-out.

In configurations using flexible carrier mapping, it is now possible to remove


WCDMA carriers without having to reconfigure the whole sector. This is useful in
mixed mode when moving frequencies from one standard to another.

2.8.8 License Mismatch Improvement


This feature enables a 36 hour time period during which serious problems with
the key file or incorrect system time can be solved. During this time period the
node works normally with the installed licenses enabled.

If there is an unexpected mismatch in the license state, an alarm is issued. The


alarm stays active for 36 hours or until it is acted on. During the license mismatch,
the Licensing cannot read the license status from the License Key File. Any
licenses that are enabled at the start of the License Mismatch alarm stay enabled
throughout the duration of the alarm, even though the License Server cannot
interpret the validity of the License Keys. The alarm ceases automatically after 36
hours. At that time, licenses are disabled which can cause traffic disturbances.

For more details, seeLicenses and Hardware Activation Codes in Ericsson


Software Model.

2.8.9 RBS 6000 MMI Improvement, LED and Maintenance Button for the RU
The following enhancement is introduced for the Maintenance button in RBS
6000: Technician present indication through the RU maintenance button, to
highlight to remote applications that someone is present at the site.

2.8.10 WCDMA Configurations for DUW41/31/11


DUW41/31/11 is introduced for RBS 6000. It is an improved DUW in terms of
capacity. The MP is a multi-core processor. The new DUW is HW-ready for future
functionality and larger configurations. It can be used to upgrade and expand
RBS 6000.

86 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.8.11 AIR as One Unit


This improvement introduces a new design pattern where the Remote Radio
Unit multi-standard (RRUS) or ARUS inside Antenna Integrated Radio (AIR) is
"hidden", that is, encapsulated by the AIR unit. As a result, AIR is perceived as
one manageable unit from an operator point of view. With this feature, the AIR
unit is modeled and handled as a field replaceable unit.

During upgrade, the RBS configuration for AIR is converted to the new
configuration only if sector::userLabel = "*A_I_R#".

2.8.12 Mixed Mode Support for AIR Products


This improvement enables Multistandard Mixed Mode (MSMM) features
(GSM+WCDMA, GSM+LTE and WCDMA+LTE) to use existing AIR products.
Mixed mode configurations with AIR 21 and AIR 11 are possible, where it is
possible to run one (R)RUS in mixed mode and the other (R)RUS in single mode.

2.8.13 Cascading of MSMM RRUS and SM R(RUS)


This improvement enables MSMM configurations for cascaded RRUS
configurations (where a number of RRUSes are connected to the same DU CPRI
port).

The following WCDMA combinations are supported:

— WCDMA Singe Mode RRUS cascaded with MSMM WCDMA+LTE RRUS

— WCDMA Singe Mode RRUS cascaded with MSMM WCDMA+GSM RRUS

— LTE Single Mode RRUS cascaded with MSMM WCDMA+LTE RRUS

— GSM Single Mode RRUS cascaded with MSMM WCDMA+GSM RRUS

For further details and limitations, refer to RBS Configurations.

2.8.14 MMI Improvement


The Man-Machine Interface for DUW is improved in the following ways:

— Introduction of "Alarm Suppressed Mode" and "Full Maintenance Mode",


which can be activated through the maintenance button on the DUW.

The yellow status LED provides hardware status information (indicating to the
technician on site if it is OK to leave the site)

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 87


Basic Features

2.8.15 Link Adaptations Improvements for HSDPA


This system improvement introduces support for larger Transport Block Sizes
(TBSs) for codes 1-13. It also uses abundant HS-PDSCH power to reduce
BLER, and finer TBS granularity to minimize rounding effects (which gives more
efficient HS-PDSCH power).

2.8.16 Increased Connectivity of Iub Links for Evo Controller 8200/RNC


In the W13.0 release, the maximum number of UTRAN cells, LA, RA and URA are
increased for Evo Controller 8200/RNC.

The increased Iub Link and Cell related limits enable more RBSs and Cells per
RNC node.

The increase of cells, RBSs and cell relations improves the RNC maximum
capacity in traffic models where cells, RBSs or cell relations have been the
capacity limiting factor.

The increase of cells per CC device improves the HW utilization in traffic models.

2.8.17 Additional UE Capability Handling


This improvement adds a number of UE capabilities after incoming IRATHO from
GSM. The additional UE capabilities are stored in the Relocation procedures for
incoming IRATHO from GSM, which means the UE can use all of its UTRAN
supported capabilities after the handover. For example, an establishment of a PS
RAB with EUL/HS is possible during the ongoing connection.

2.8.18 Speed Up Handling of Incoming Relocations


Handling of the UTRAN Mobility Information procedure is improved. After
sending a UTRAN Mobility Information message to a UE, the RNC now continues
with an incoming relocation instead of waiting for a UE reply, and the UE reply
is checked later. By using asynchronous message handling, the UTRAN procedure
for incoming relocations is quicker. The new handling is implemented for PSHO
for LTE, but also for legacy functions Inter-RAT Handover (CS) from GSM and
Core Network Hard Handover (CNHHO).

2.8.19 Extended Dynamic Range


The Extended Dynamic Range improvement (introducing a 7-bit D-AGC) has
been modified. It is now possible to activate or deactivate the improvement
with the MOM parameter featureStateImprovedDAgc in the RBS MO
NodeBFunction. The improvement is deactivated by default, and normally no
configuration action is required.

88 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.8.20 Reduction of EUL 2 ms TTI Control Channel Overhead


Control channel power is reduced by changing gain factors for EUL 2 ms TTI.
This means that EUL 2 ms users cause less uplink (UL) interference, both
when transmitting and not transmitting data in the UL. It is expected that EUL
throughput is improved in situations when having several EUL 2 ms users in a
cell, especially for smartphones where users transmit bursts of data with relative
long silent periods in between.

2.8.21 Improved EUL 10 ms TTI coverage


EUL 10 ms TTI coverage is improved by changing the minimum transport format
set that could be used for coverage limited situations for EUL 10 ms. This way
uplink power is optimized so that both data and control channels are maintained
longer when uplink is power limited. This means that EUL 10 ms TTI retainability
is improved.

2.8.22 Improved Grant Rotation


This is an improvement of the grant rotation round robin scheme
(applicable in Uu overload). In an RBS, a new operator parameter
eulMaxTotalProtectedRate is introduced to control the maximum protected
grant at grant rotation. A higher value of eulMaxTotalProtectedRate can
reduce pmWaitingTimeEul and increase cell throughput.

2.8.23 Improved SNM Robustness


An improvement in Signaling Network Manager (SNM) placement is introduced
for EvoC 8200/RNC. The scc_server with SNM role is now always placed on the
C2 MP. The new placement of SNM role can reduce traffic disturbance in some
situations during EPB blade restart since the SNM role is no longer placed on the
blades.

2.8.24 Heterogeneous Networks


A mix of cells with different output power is supported, in particular an
existing macro grid can be complemented by low power small cells reusing
the macro carrier frequency. The system supports at least 6 dB imbalance
between downlink and uplink link budgets comparing adjacent cells (accounting
for differences in downlink transmit power and uplink receiver sensitivity).

2.8.25 SCTP Zero Window Supervision


This improvement increases the robustness of SCTP in case of congestion on
remote side indicated by SACK chunks with receiving window credit equal to 0.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 89


Basic Features

This is done with a timer in SCTP which controls the duration of the Zero Window
Probing procedure and allows to abort the association if SACK chunks with only
RWND equal to 0 is received during the supervision time. The supervision timer is
hardcoded to 4 * associationMaxRtx * maximumRTO.

2.8.26 Start of DL Physical Channel DPCCH in RBS


This improvement modifies the RBS behavior so that the start of DL DPCCH is
3GPP compliant.

In previous releases, the RBS starts the DL physical channel DPCCH together
with DPDCH when DL Iub user plane synchronization has been achieved on all
transport bearers. This improvement changes the behavior in the RBS to start
the DL-DPCCH directly at the configuration setup, which is compliant with 3GPP
25.214.

2.8.27 SW support for RUS 01 and RRUS 01 B0 for WCDMA and MSMM
GSM+WCDMA
(R)RUS 01 is the radio unit previously used in GSM on Band 0 (900P) and it
is introduced for WCDMA, using platform 4 and platform 5 Radio HW. WCDMA
does not define a specific band 0. Instead, the already existing Band 8 is used.
Band 0 is a subset and within range of Band 8, cells can be set up on band 0 even
though the Band 8 is configured

2.8.28 Micro RRUS Support


This release supports the micro RRUS (part of the heterogeneous networks small
cell toolbox), which is intended for installations in hotspots.

2.9 FAJ 121 3638: System Improvements in WRAN W14


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W14 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 4 Node Support for System Improvements in WRAN W14 Release


System Improvement RNC DU Radio Node Baseband
Radio Node
SW Support for Micro N/A N/A (Micro N/A
RBS6501 RBS6501)

90 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System Improvement RNC DU Radio Node Baseband


Radio Node
SW Support for RBS6120 N/A X N/A
with DAC
GPS Out with LTE Backup N/A X N/A
Sync Source
SW Support for RUS02 and N/A X N/A
RRUS02 B0 for WCDMA and
MSMM GSM+WCDMA
Increased Number of X N/A N/A
Supported Cell Relations for
EvoC 8200/RNC
Changed Non-HS Power X N/A N/A
Filtering
Support for Long SS7 X N/A N/A
Messages
WCDMA SW Support for N/A X N/A
RRUS A2
Improved URA/FACH X N/A N/A
Handling
Robustness for ET Board X N/A N/A
Failure
Configurable Puncturing X N/A N/A
Limit for EDCH 2 ms TTI
Users
EUL Soft Handover N/A X N/A
Improvements
Controlled RNC Upgrade X N/A N/A
Restart
Upgrade Duration Time X X N/A
Improved RLC and SRB X N/A N/A
Alignment
Dynamic Measurement X N/A N/A
Control Delay Handling

2.9.1 SW support for Micro RBS 6501


The system improvement RBS 6000 Micro Support introduces the support for the
micro RBS (RBS 6501) in the WCDMA RAN product. The micro RBS is a product
in the RBS 6000 family and the HW is prepared to support simultaneous service
of WCDMA and LTE or GSM, that is, mixed mode. The current release of the micro
RBS supports only single mode, that is, either WCDMA or LTE.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 91


Basic Features

More information about the micro RBS can be found in RBS Description and
Configuring HSDPA and EUL.

2.9.2 SW Support for RBS 6120 with DAC


The RBS 6120 with Direct Air Cooling (DAC) is a new RBS type based on the
Generic Support System Platform (GSS). The GSS is a platform where the same
building practice can be reused for a variety of applications like RBS. Introduction
of this new RBS type in a network is simplified compared to non-GSS-based RBS
types, as the configuration can be done already in the factory before delivery to a
customer.

2.9.3 GPS Out with LTE Backup Synch Source


The system improvement GPS Out with LTE Backup Synch Source improves
cell availability for LTE cells served by MSMM radios in the situation where the
MSMM timing master system is shut down.

2.9.4 SW Support for RUS02 and RRUS02 B0 for WCDMA and MSMM
GSM+WCDMA
The system improvement SW Support for RUS02 and RRUS02 B0 for WCDMA
and MSMM GSM+WCDMA introduces (R)RUS 01/02. (R)RUS 01/02 is the radio
unit previously used in GSM on Band 0 (900P), and it is introduced for WCDMA,
using platform 4 and platform 5 Radio HW. WCDMA does not define a specific
band 0. Instead, the already existing band 8 is used. Band 0 is a subset and
within range of band 8, cells can be set up on band 0 even though the band 8 is
configured.

2.9.5 Increased Number of Cell Relations for EvoC 8200/RNC


This system improvement introduces the following changes:

— The maximum number for cell relations (the sum of all UTRAN relations,
GSM relations, E-UTRAN Frequency relations and coverage relations) is
extended from 160,000 to 220,000 for the Evo Controller 8200/RNC.

— The maximum number of External UTRAN cells from 2,304 to 5,301 for Evo
Controller 8200/RNC.

2.9.6 Changed Non-HS Power Filtering


The Downlink (DL) transmitted carrier power is measured by the RBS and
periodically (once per second) reported to the RNC. These power values are used
as the basis for DL power admission control, but also for load sharing features,
such as FAJ 121 435: Inter-Frequency Load Sharing.

92 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.9.7 Support for Long SS7 Messages


This system improvement enables sending long SCCP messages in
connectionless mode (LUDT), without the need for fragmenting the message
before sending it. This speeds up the time to process the messages. The
improvement is only applicable for IP links.

More information regarding the system improvement can be found in IP


Transport Network Configuration and Signalling System No.7.

2.9.8 WCDMA SW Support for RRUS A2


This system improvement introduces RBS SW support for the new RRUS A2 HW.
An RRUS A2 contains two RX chains and can be used in combination with an
RRUS or RRUW to support 4-way RX diversity.

For configurations with RRUS A2, two new Radio Building Blocks, RBB14_1A
and RBB24_1B, are introduced.

2.9.9 Improved URA/FACH Handling


This system improvement minimizes the risk of missed CS pages for the UEs that
are PS-connected and is by default activated.

Improved handling, during the CELL_FACH to URA_PCH reconfiguration process


is as follows:
— If a SCRI with cause code "data session end" is received, the reconfiguration
to URA is continued. It is done irrespective of whether the SCRI is received
before or after sending the RRC Physical Channel Reconfiguration message.

— If a SCRI without the cause code, or any other code, is received, then the
release to idle mode is performed. It is done irrespective of whether the SCRI
is received before or after RRC Physical Channel Reconfiguration message is
sent.

— If a CU with the cause code "AM RLC unrecoverable error" or "Radio link
failure" is received, then the release to idle mode is performed.

Handling of incoming page, during the URA_PCH to CELL_FACH upswitch


process is as follows:
— The state change from URA_PCH to CELL_FACH in the RNC is moved to
an earlier point after receiving the Cell Update message. After receiving the
UTRAN Mobility Information Confirm message or after L3 timeout (Tcuc),
the suspended radio bearers are resumed.

— A potential CS page is prevented from being sent as a URA page (URNTI),


and the page is kept in the RLC buffer until the RBs are resumed. Then, the
page is sent as a Page Type 2 on FACH.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 93


Basic Features

2.9.10 Robustness for ET-board Failure


The system improvement Robustness for ET-board Failure introduces the flow
control functionality for the control plane in IP ET boards (BP processor). The aim
of this feature is to prevent IP ET boards from crashing in some cases of high
level of CPU load, and thus to improve the IP ET robustness. This improvement is
relevant for IP ET boards: ET-IPG and ET-MFG.

2.9.11 Configurable Puncturing Limit for EDCH 2 ms TTI Users


An RncFunction::spareA[4] parameter is introduced to allow the users to
change the puncturing limit for EDCH 2 ms TTI users. It helps to increase the
throughput for EDCH 2 ms TTI users.

2.9.12 EUL Soft Handover Improvements


This is a part of W15 System Improvement. For more information, refer to EUL
Soft Handover Improvements on page 99.

2.9.13 Controlled RNC Upgrade Restart


This system improvement enhances RNC SW upgrade. With the new option, the
upgrade procedure is split into two phases. The first phase includes preparations
for the upgrade, for example, data conversions. The second phase includes the
activation of the new SW through a node restart.

The first phase can be performed in parallel for several RNCs as a preparation for
the second phase. Since the first phase involves a JVM restart, but without traffic
impact, it is recommended to perform it in the maintenance window.

The second phase, which has impact on network availability, is triggered


manually at an appropriate time. In this phase one RNC at a time is upgraded.
Since the second phase is only part of the total upgrade time, the overall effect is
that more RNCs than before are possible to upgrade in one maintenance window.

Since the node restart occurs immediately after the second phase begins, it
provides control over the upgrade restart and thus node unavailability.

The selection of upgrade option is done in the SHM in ENM.

2.9.14 Upgrade Duration Time


This system improvement optimizes the execution of tasks during the upgrade.
The SW upgrade duration is defined as the time from the upgrade started in the
node until it can be confirmed. Consequently, less time is spent on the upgrade
and in non-standard operation mode.

94 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.9.15 Improved RLC and SRB Alignment


This system improvement aligns parameters for certain radio bearers so that
channel switching between those radio bearers has a lower risk for drops. It also
reduces the risk of failure during the handover. Also, less signaling is required at
channel switching.

2.9.16 Dynamic Measurement Control Delay Handling


This system improvement enhances measurement control handling and is by
default activated. In many cases, the RNC needs to send a number of RRC
Measurement Control messages to the UE, but early releases of UEs provide
limited capacity in terms of handling a lot of such messages at the same time.
Therefore, the RNC has a mechanism that delays some of the messages for an
appropriate time.

With this improvement, the RNC can handle measurement control procedure
according to the capacity of each UE and newer UEs have better capacity
to handle RRC Measurement Control message. For the UE in Release-6 or
later, the Dynamic Measurement Control Delay Handling optimizes the signaling
sequences and can decrease the setup time in a number of cases.

The system improvement is controlled by dynMeasCtrlDelayEnabled which


enables or disables the functionality. When enabled, the RNC handles
Measurement Control messages according to the capability of each UE.

2.9.17 Support for Commscope ™ CommRET v2


The DU Radio Node supports Commscope™ CommRET v2. With this system
improvement, the following are enhanced:

— Two DUs can share one AISG Remote Electrical Tilt Unit (RETU).

— Repeated Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) requests from one DU are rejected
when the previous one is being performed.

— RET status is visible with the attribute RetDevice::tiltChangeStatus.

The following operations can only be performed from one DU at a time. When the
operation is being performed, requests from the other DU are rejected.

— RET calibration

— RETU hardware test

— RET configuration

If the RET configuration is being performed from one DU, the later
configuration request from another DU is automatically sent to the RETU

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 95


Basic Features

every five minutes. If the request is rejected at the sixth time, the alarm
RetFailure is raised.

2.10 FAJ 121 4083: System Improvements in WRAN W15


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W15 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 5
System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband Radio
Node Node
AMR NB/WB Complete X N/A N/A
Configuration for IRAT
AMR NB/WB Initial Rate X N/A N/A
Selection for IRAT and
CNHHO
Split Max SIR Target X N/A N/A
Device Optimized HS/ X N/A N/A
FACH and EUL/FACH
EUL Soft Handover N/A X N/A
Improvements
Flexible Carrier Allocation N/A X N/A
in RBB
Optimised RRC Message X N/A N/A
for Speech mRAB
Battery Charging N/A X N/A
Enhancements
Security Mode Command X N/A N/A
Procedure Enhancement
Support for PDU 0301 N/A X N/A
RBS 6000 with RRUS A2 N/A X N/A
in Multi Standard Mixed
Mode
Capacity Improvement X N/A N/A
for UserPlane in Evo
Controller 8200/RNC with
New SW Allocation

96 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband Radio


Node Node
Configurable Back-Off X N/A N/A
Timer for RACH Preamble
Reattempt
Dual Mixed Mode for AIR N/A X N/A
GLONASS Sync X X N/A
Migrating Evo Controller X N/A N/A
8200/RNC from Using
APP to Using CAX
RBS 6000 with AIR 32 in N/A X N/A
WCDMA and MSMM
Configuration for X N/A N/A
SIGTRAN in Evo Controller
8200/RNC
RBS 6000 with RRUSx3 N/A X N/A
(WARP3.5)
Support for 16 WCDMA X N/A N/A
Carriers Over Iur
Improved RRC and Paging X N/A N/A
Handling
Support for New Radio N/A X N/A
HW: RUS 03
Sync Alarm Improvement N/A X N/A
- Holdover Alarm
Increased Uplink N/A X N/A
CE Capacity on
DUW11/31/41 and RBS
6501
Improved SW Support for N/A X N/A
RRUS13 and RRUS A3
to Support up to Eight
WCDMA Carriers
EUL/HS Serving Cell X N/A N/A
Change Improvement
Multi Standard N/A X N/A
Configurations Across
Multiple Cabinets
New Parameter for Non- X N/A N/A
Used Frequency Threshold
Reduce Upgrade Duration X N/A N/A
Time

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 97


Basic Features

System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband Radio


Node Node
Extended Value Range for X N/A N/A
RSCP
DUW MP Overload N/A X N/A
Protection
Improved RAB Activation N/A X N/A
Control
50% More DL CE for DUW N/A X N/A
11
Reduced Restart Time X N/A N/A
to Support Increased
Number of Cells
Improved Handling of N/A X N/A
WCDMA RBS Counters
Increased Number of X N/A N/A
Signaling Routes in a
Signaling Route Set
Improved Accuracy of X N/A N/A
IRAT HO Counters for
AMR WB Multi RAB

2.10.1 AMR NB/WB Complete Configuration for IRAT


This improvement introduces a complete configuration of the speech RAB at
an incoming IRAT handover of speech from GSM or LTE, instead of the initial
configuration. As a result, the reconfiguration of the RAB after setting up the RAB
in WCDMA is not needed. Moreover, the SRB4 is established at the same time the
RAB is set up, thus avoiding the setup of SRB4 at a later stage. Since the extra
reconfiguration is not needed, and the establishment of SRB4 is done in an earlier
stage, the waiting time for soft handover is no longer needed. It means that the
additional soft handover legs can be added at an earlier stage.

This System Improvement covers a complete configuration for AMR NB Set7,


AMR NB MM Set14, and AMR WB.

This system improvement is default off and can be activated and deactivated
with the RabHandling::amrIratRabConfig parameter.

More information about this system improvement can be found in Handover.

2.10.2 AMR NB/WB Initial Rate Selection for IRAT and CNHHO
This improvement introduces a full initial rate selection at an incoming IRAT
handover from GSM or LTE and incoming CNHHO of CS speech. By doing the
initial rate selection for AMR NB, it is possible to establish AMR NB MM low-rate

98 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

(AMR NB MM SR 7.95, AMR NB MM SR 5.9, or AMR NB MM SR 4.75). All of the


mentioned rates, except AMR NB MM SR 7.95, use a lower downlink spreading
factor, thus being more resource efficient. It is also possible to limit the uplink/
downlink rate for AMR NB MM Set14 and AMR NB MM Set1 at the incoming
IRAT/CNHHO.

Initial rate selection at incoming CNHHO is default on, and cannot be


deactivated. Initial rate selection for incoming IRAT is default off, and is
activated and deactivated together with the System Improvement AMR NB/WB
Complete Configuration using the RabHandling::amrIratRabConfig parameter.

More information about this system improvement can be found in Handover.

2.10.3 Split Max SIR Target


This system improvement introduces the possibility to set different maximum SIR
target for EUL 10ms users and R99 users. It can be used to improve the cell
coverage and cell capacity by setting a lower value for EUL 10ms than for R99. A
separate parameter, sirMaxTti10, is introduced, with the same default value as
the corresponding parameter for R99. Hence, there is no impact on the network
unless the value of the parameter is changed. EUL 2ms is not affected.

This system improvement is default off and is activated by changing the


sirMaxTti10 parameter.

2.10.4 Device Optimized HS/FACH and EUL/FACH


This improvement allows the operator to configure the network to prevent
certain types of UE from entering CELL_FACH and URA_PCH states. It also
allows the RNC to multi-cast the RRC Connection Setup and RRC Connection
Reject messages to both R99 FACH and HS-FACH.

The FAJ 121 2267: Differentiated UE Handling feature is a prerequisite for this
system improvement.

More information about this system improvement can be found in High Speed
Downlink for FACH.

2.10.5 EUL Soft Handover Improvements


This system improvement increases the EUL cell throughput in soft handover
scenarios when the Serving Cell of the UE has temporarily bad radio conditions.

EUL cell throughput can be seen from the PINTEUL_I_ULTP_L1 formula in the
Radio Network KPI.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 99


Basic Features

2.10.6 Flexible Carrier Allocation in RBB


This system improvement brings the following benefits:

A carrier can be allocated to any Radio Unit (RU) freely in a Radio Building Block
(RBB) in an RBS. Thus the RUs can be used more efficiently, for example in terms
of power, or Instantaneous Bandwidth (IBW). Additionally, more carriers can be
configured in each sector when they are separated from other carriers in the
frequency beyond the IBW requirement of RU.

The maximum number of supported carriers on one sector is extended from four
to eight, which allows the customers to use fewer RUs to support the same
number of carriers.

This system improvement facilitates the operator to configure their own network,
and makes the deployment of shared networks easier.

It is also the basis for the full use of more powerful RUs potential in later releases.

More information about this system improvement can be found in RBS


Configurations.

2.10.7 Optimised RRC Message for Speech mRAB


With this system improvement activated, at the setup of packet, at the release of
packet, and at the channel switching for mRAB with speech, the speech and SRB
configuration are not repeated because the UE already receives the information
from earlier signaling. For these transitions, the latency is reduced by an average
of 300 ms, and depending on the radio environment, the retainability can be
improved as well.

This system improvement is default on, and is activated and deactivated with the
RRC::rrcLengthOptimizationSpeech parameter.

2.10.8 Battery Charging Enhancements


This system improvement provides improved handling of battery charging to
make the system safer in the following ways:

— If the battery temperature sensor is missing or faulty, the system stops


charging the battery.

— The operator is informed by an alarm in case the battery condition is too


poor, and the Battery Fuse Unit (BFU) is not able to connect it into the
system.

This system improvement introduces the Battery Disconnected alarm on the


BatteryBackup MO. The alarm with additional text Battery voltage too low
to be safety connected is raised when the system disconnects or does not
connect the battery for safety reasons.

100 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

The alarm with additional text Battery temp sensor not detected is raised
when the system disconnects the battery for charging due to the missing battery
temperature sensor or faulty temperature sensor.

This system improvement prevents battery charging in unsafe circumstances, and


thus personal and cabinet safety is improved.

More information about this alarm can be found in Battery Disconnected for
Baseband and Battery Disconnected for RBS.

2.10.9 Security Mode Command Enhancement


The system improvement CS Fallback Security Mode Command Enhancement
aims to reduce the call setup time after the CS Fallback (CSFB) from LTE
to WCDMA is performed by UE. The RAB setup time for some scenarios
independently from CSFB is also reduced.

2.10.10 Support for PDU 0301


The system improvement SW Support for PDU 0301 enables the support of
configuring a new Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 03 01 into the RBS system.
With the new PDU 03 01 hardware, many ECM/Efuse variants can be used. It
gives flexibility and cost efficiency in the deployment of the RBS capacity, that is,
facilitating the step-by-step expansion of the system (HW-wise) or rebuilding the
HW system.

The PDU 03 01 can be used in Generic Support System (GSS) based RBS, as well
as the legacy RBS 6000 without GSS.

More information about this system improvement can be found in PDU


Description.

2.10.11 RBS 6000 with RRUS A2 in Multi Standard Mixed Mode


This system improvement introduces RRUS A2 in Multistandard Mixed Mode
(MSMM) configuration (WCDMA + LTE, WCDMA + GSM). The Operator can build
an MSMM node with 4-way RX diversity capability with a cost efficiency solution
of RRUS A2.

Two new Mixed Mode compliance RBBs, that is: RBB14_2A and RBB24_2B, are
introduced.

2.10.12 Capacity Improvement for UserPlane in Evo Controller 8200/RNC with New
SW Allocation
In most traffic cases, the number of DC devices limits the node capacity for Evo
Controller 8200/RNC. This system improvement introduces more efficient use of

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 101


Basic Features

HW resources, resulting in a decreased load on DC devices giving an increased


maximum number of users in the RNC.

The SW allocation on all traffic handling EPBs in the Evo Controller 8200/RNC
is changed. On the primary processor on EPB1, one MC is moved from Core 5 to
Core 0 and one DC device is added to Core 5. All traffic handling EPBs have the
same SW allocation.

This system improvement is at default on and cannot be deactivated.

2.10.13 Configurable Back-Off Timer for RACH Preamble Reattempt


This system improvement introduces new parameters to allow configuration of
RACH preamble reattempts. The new configurable parameters, nb01Min and
nb01Max, are used to set the back-off timer. The effect is that the access channel
can be used more efficiently, leading to lower RoT, lower FACH drop rate and
increased RACH throughput in high load cases.

This system improvement is default on, but to get new back-off timer value, the
parameters nb01Min and nb01Max must be changed.

2.10.14 Dual Mixed Mode for AIR


This system improvement introduces the support of two-way cascading of CPRI
links on AIR 21 (Antenna Integrated Radio) with RBB 24_1A configured. The
definition of a two-way CPRI link is that both downlink and uplink IQ-data from
two different RANs are transmitted in the same direction on the link

It enables two different RANs to access all antennas in an AIR 21 unit configured
for mixed mode because AIR 21 has only two CPRI ports accessible. In this
release, mixed mode WCDMA + GSM is supported.

2.10.15 GLONASS Sync


This system improvement provides the use of GLONASS as an RBS timing
reference, as a complement to GPS. The GNSS Receiver Unit, GPS03, selects
the satellite signals with the highest Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR), among the
connected GPS and GLONASS satellites. It is beneficial in areas where GPS
access is limited, where a significantly more reliable timing reference can be
provided. If GPS access is limited or completely missing, GPS03 can as well run
on GLONASS only.

2.10.16 Migrating Evo Controller 8200/RNC from Using APP to Using CAX
The purpose of this system improvement is to provide a migration procedure
for migrating Evo Controllers 8200/RNC from using APP to using CAX. The
procedure is developed to run on a live Evo Controller 8200/RNC without the
need to take down the node or traffic.

102 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For the migration procedure description, refer to Upgrade from APP to CAX.

2.10.17 RBS 6000 with AIR 32 in WCDMA and MSMM


The system improvement RBS 6000 with AIR 32 in WCDMA and MSMM
introduces support for AIR 32 in the WCDMA RAN product.

With this improvement, a new sector configuration of RBB44_1D is supported for


AIR 32. AIR 32 hardware is an Antenna Integrated Radio Unit contained in one
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU).

AIR 32 can be used in real MSMM configurations with LTE FDD/GSM.

2.10.18 Configuration for SIGTRAN in Evo Controller 8200/RNC


The purpose of this improvement is to allow the reconfiguration of SCTP Front
Ends (FEs). The FE handles the communication with the CN and contains the
SCTP-stack.

The SCTP FE in EvoC 8200/RNC can be reconfigured in the following ways:

— SCTP FE from non-robust to robust

— SCTP FE from robust to non-robust

More information about this system improvement can be found in Reconfigure


SCTP Front Ends.

2.10.19 RBS 6000 with RRUSx3 (WARP3.5)


This system improvement introduces RRUS 13 and RRUS A3 with WARP3.5.
RRUS 13 is a radio unit previously supported in GSM and LTE and is in this
release introduced for WCDMA. RRUS A3 is a radio unit previously supported in
LTE and is in this release introduced for WCDMA

2.10.20 Support for 16 WCDMA Carriers Over Iur


The maximum number of WCDMA carriers is increased from 8 to 16 in an RNC
and over Iur. It enables an operator to configure up to 2064 WCDMA carriers in
total, 16 WCDMA carriers in the RNC and 2048 WCDMA carriers in the external
RNCs (16 WCDMA carriers for each IUR link). An operator with many frequency
bands in the same region can benefit from this improvement.

2.10.21 Improved RRC and Paging Handling


Radio Resource Control (RRC) and paging handling is now improved.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 103


Basic Features

2.10.22 Support for New Radio HW: RUS 03


WCDMA SW supports the following new radio HW:

— RUS 03

— RRUS 32 with MSMM support

— Radio 2203

— Radio 2217

— RBS 6120 cabinet enhanced with the thermosiphon cooling system

— RBS 6110 with Direct Air Cooling

2.10.23 Sync Alarm Improvement - Holdover Alarm


A new holdover alarm is introduced. The alarm is triggered when the last
synchronization source is lost and the RBS goes into the frequency holdover.
The holdover alarm is cleared when synchronization is re-established and the
RBS leaves the frequency holdover mode.

A new alarm is introduced for cases when wander is detected on synchronization


reference. New PM counters are introduced for particular radio clock states.

2.10.24 Increased Uplink CE Capacity on DUW 11/31/41 and RBS 6501


The Uplink (UL) Channel Element (CE) capacity is increased on DUW 11, DUW
31, DUW 41, and RBS 6501. Both the static and dynamic CEs are increased.

2.10.25 Improved SW Support for RRUS 13 and RRUS A3, to Support up to Eight
WCDMA Carriers
This system improvement is applicable to RRUS 13 and RRUS A3.

2.10.26 EUL/HS Serving Cell Change Improvement


The handling of EUL users is improved at the high cell load conditions.

2.10.27 Multi-Standard Configurations Across Multiple RBS Cabinets


An LTE node can be configured across multiple RBS cabinets to handle the
support system in all cabinets. In such multi-cabinet configurations, a WCDMA
node can operate as a secondary node in a respective cabinet, and a DUW with
its connected Macro Radio Units are then located in the same cabinet. A WCDMA
node is configured within one cabinet and not across multiple cabinets.

104 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.10.28 New Parameter for Non-Used Frequency Threshold


The RNC parameters for the Inter-Frequency Handover (IFHO) thresholds for the
non-used frequency for both Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) are
replaced by new RNC parameters.

2.10.29 Reduce Upgrade Duration Time


The SW upgrade duration time is reduced at the next upgrade after the upgrade
to W15.1 SW.

2.10.30 Extended Value Range for RSCP


This system improvement extends the lower bound of the RSCP
thresholds that are sent to the UE in Measurement Control message,
for the used frequency and the non-used frequency. The thresholds are
changed from -115 dBm to -120 dBm for events 2b, 2d, and 2f. The
value ranges for the attributes UtranCell::usedFreqThresh2dRscp and
UeMeasControl::usedFreqThresh2dRscpDrnc are therefore extended from
{-115..-25} dBm to {-120..-25} dBm.

This system improvement enables using the Rel-5 Information Element (IE)
Delta CPICH RSCP for inter-frequency cell measurement evaluation. This IE is
reported by the UE in the "Inter-frequency cell measurement results" in the
Measurement Report message.

Note: The Inter Radio Access Technology (IRAT) minimum measurement


thresholds for WCDMA and other systems for event 3a are not affected,
and remain at -115 dBm, as allowed by the 3GPP standard.

2.10.31 DUW MP Overload Protection


The MP overload protection is enhanced for DUW 10, DUW 11, DUW 20, DUW
30, DUW 31, DUW 41, and RBS 6501.

2.10.32 Improved RAB Activation Control


The system improvement introduces the possibility to steer which RABs are
enabled or used in the network and allows for turning off and on the legacy UeRc
instances, that are not license-controlled but turned on by default.

This system improvement provides greater control of disallowing certain RAB


combinations, for UL and DL.

For more information, refer to Connection Handling and Flow of Users in WCDMA
Radio Networks.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 105


Basic Features

2.10.33 50% More DL CE for DUW 11


This is a part of W16A system improvement. For more information, refer to 50%
More DL CE for DUW 11 on page 109.

2.10.34 Reduced Restart Time to Support Increased Number of Cells


A reduction of signaling needed in the RNC node restart makes it more robust
and supports full mobility very shortly after RNC node restart is completed.

2.10.35 Improved Handling of WCDMA RBS Counters


Handling of the WCDMA RBS
counters UplinkBaseBandPool::pmSamplesCapacityUlCe and
DownlinkBaseBandPool::pmSamplesCapacityDlCe is improved.

The change is introduced to simplify the calculation of the used CE in an


RBS where pmSumCapacityUlCe is divided by pmSamplesCapacityUlCe. The
calculation of the CE consumption on the node level is therefore simplified.

The equivalent changes are valid also for DownlinkBaseBandPool.

2.10.36 Increased Number of Signaling Routes in a Signaling Route Set


The maximum number of IP signaling routes in a signaling route set is increased
from 5 to 16.

2.10.37 Improved Accuracy of IRAT HO Counters for AMR WB Multi RAB


The accuracy of the following counters has been improved:

— GsmRelation::pmNoAttOutIratHoMulti

— GsmRelation::pmNoSuccessOutIratHoMulti

— GsmRelation::pmNoFailOutIratHoMultiGsmFailure

— GsmRelation::pmNoFailOutIratHoMultiReturnOldChNotPhyChFail

— GsmRelation::pmNoFailOutIratHoMultiReturnOldChPhyChFail

— GsmRelation::pmNoFailOutIratHoMultiUeRejection

— UtranCell::pmNoOutGanIratHoAttMulti

— UtranCell::pmNoOutGanIratHoReqMulti

— UtranCell::pmNoOutGanIratHoSuccMulti

106 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.11 FAJ 121 4410: System Improvements in WRAN W16


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W16 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 6 Node Support for FAJ 121 4602: System Improvements in WRAN W16
Release
System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband
Node Radio
Node
TX Power Lock Remotely Settable - Small N/A X X
Cell Specific Procedure mRBS and mRRU
Flexible Sectorization in DBB N/A X N/A
Removal of Secondary DU in RBS N/A X N/A
50% More DL CE for DUW 11 N/A X N/A
Improved Supervision of Cell States X N/A N/A
Automatic Conversion to Flexible Carrier N/A X N/A
Mapping
BFU Parallel Operation N/A X N/A
Support for RRUS 32 in WCDMA N/A X N/A
Dynamic IPv4 Address Allocation for O&M N/A X N/A
CS Streaming with Fixed Maximum Bit X N/A N/A
Rate
Improved Radio SW for Mixed Mode with N/A X N/A
GSM
Remove Possibility to Block X N/A N/A
IpAccessHostPool
Unique Logical Name for WCDMA N/A X X
Improved IRAT and/or IFHO Selection X N/A N/A
Handling
Improved PM Handling X N/A N/A
Visualize Ericsson Radio System Market N/A X X
Names
HSDPA User DL CE Cost Adaptation for X N/A X
Baseband 52-Series

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 107


Basic Features

System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband


Node Radio
Node
RBS 6000 with AIR 32 Multi Band N/A X X
Configurations
RBS 6601 V2 Configurations N/A X N/A
Power 6302 N/A X N/A
Optimized Management of Support Units N/A X N/A
Support for Enclosure 6320 N/A X N/A
Optimization of SFTP Characteristics X X N/A
Radio 2212 in Ericsson Radio System N/A X N/A
Radio 2219 in Ericsson Radio System N/A X N/A
Reduced Radio Unit Power Consumption N/A X X
Updated Parameter Default Values for X X X
RNC and RBS
Prioritized CS Setup during PS Inactivity X N/A N/A
WCDMA Support for Changed CPRI Delay N/A X X
DL BLER Measurement Ordered for all X N/A N/A
Transport Channels in RES
Inter Vendor HSDPA Serving Cell Change X N/A N/A
over Iur
Reduced Setup Time from Cell DCH, Faster N/A X X
Time to Content
Eight WCDMA Carrier Support for RUS 03 N/A X N/A
PDU 0301 Functionality N/A X X
Simplified RAN Parameter Handling X X X
Restart Improvements X N/A N/A
Support for Baseband R503 N/A N/A X
Reduced Restart Times at Loss of CPRI N/A X N/A
O&M Link
CPRI Robustness Improvement N/A N/A X

2.11.1 TX Power Lock Remotely Settable - Small Cell Specific Procedure mRBS
and mRRU
The total TX output power for a micro unit can now be locked by the
txPowerPersistentLock attribute. Therefore, the unwanted total output power
changes to a higher value can be prevented during normal operation. When
txPowerPersistentLock is set to true, it is not possible to do the following:

108 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Changing the total output power for a micro unit

— Seting txPowerPersistentLock back to false

— Deleting Sector Carrier

If txPowerPersistentLock is set to true, a reintegration of the node is required


to change the setting of the attribute and to change the value of the total output
power for a micro unit.

2.11.2 Flexible Sectorization in DBB


This improvement enables all configurations in all standards to support free
selection of DU ports for each Radio Building Block (RBB), that is a sector,
regardless of cascading between the RBBs.

The improvement results in the following benefits:

— Flexible DU port allocation is supported to reduce deployment cost.

— Up to 12 WCDMA macro sectors are supported to increase node capacity.

— Radio Unit Multistandard (RUS) macro sector cascading is supported.

— RUs and DUs can be freely placed in different cabinets to improve


deployment flexibility.

To use the functionality it is required that the node is configured with Flexible
Carrier Mapping as carrier allocation mode.

2.11.3 Removal of Secondary DU in RBS


It is now possible to remove the secondary DUW through RBS Element Manager
(EM) by converting a dual-DU Radio Node into a single-DU one.

2.11.4 50% More DL CE for DUW 11


The DL Channel Element (CE) capacity for DUW 11 is increased to support 288
DL CEs. The additional DL CEs are accessible through Hardware Activation Codes
(HWACs) and SW licenses. Larger DL CE and DL HWAC licenses must be installed
to gain access to the additional DL CEs.

2.11.5 Improved Supervision of Cell States


A new alarm is introduced that increases the observability of not operational cells
during UtranCell activation and deactivation.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 109


Basic Features

2.11.6 Automatic Conversion to Flexible Carrier Mapping


It is now possible to automatically reconfigure a node from basic or advanced
carrier allocation mode to flexible carrier allocation mode. The time required for
the conversion is reduced and the conversion of multiple nodes from basic or
advanced carrier allocation mode to flexible carrier allocation mode is allowed.
No node restart is required and no traffic is lost.

2.11.7 BFU Parallel Operation


With this improvement, two parallel Battery Fuse Units (BFUs) work as one unit
in the same power subrack. The improvement offers the following benefits:

— High-power configurations are achieved with reduced cabinet space.

— Load sharing is more efficient in high-power configurations.

2.11.8 Support for RRUS 32 in WCDMA


The support for RRUS 32 in WCDMA is now enhanced with the following:

— Two radio node licenses are introduced to control the full use of RRUS 32
power amplifier up to 160 W.

— A new alarm is introduced when the RF reflected power in the radio exceeds
the threshold.

The AISG/3GPP Compliant Tower Mounted Amplifier (ATMA) is supported on


Antenna Branch C and D, and the Antenna Interface Standards Group (AISG)
signal is supported on branch A and C.

2.11.9 Dynamic IPv4 Address Allocation for O&M


With the improvement, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) can be
used as a configuration method to assign the O&M IP address of a DU Radio
Node. This function is available when the IpInterface::configurationMode
parameter is initially set to DHCP. The improvement also supports the
assignment of the Domain Name System (DNS) address using DHCP and the
configuration of DHCP client identifier. When IpInterface::configurationMode is
set to DHCP, the DU Radio Node can get the O&M IP address from DHCP server
during the following procedures:

— Initial O&M configuration

— Node restart

— O&M IP address renewal

— Configuration re-establishment during the board replacement

110 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

For more information, refer to IP Infrastructure for O&M.

2.11.10 CS Streaming with Fixed Maximum Bit Rate


The csStreamMaxRateInit parameter can now be used to initialize the rate
for Circuit Switched (CS) streaming service. When the parameter is on, the CS
Streaming RAB is limited to the maximum bit rate, that is, the fixed Service Data
Unit (SDU) size of 576 bits with Iu Timing Interval (ITI) defined as 1.

Iu interface for CS streaming service over IP transport provides improved


interworking with Mobile Services Switching Center (MSC) and the Media
Gateway (MGW) of other vendors.

2.11.11 Improved Radio SW for Mixed Mode with GSM


After upgrading a WCDMA DU Radio Node configured in mixed mode, DL
throughput in GSM can be improved on non-G16A level, with the new radio
SW. Depending on the configuration, for example the number of DL carriers, RAN
types, or Instantaneous Bandwidth (IBW), the new radio SW version can report a
higher PAR Headroom, which leads to better throughput for GSM. Therefore, the
improvement can be observed only in some sectors or cells.

2.11.12 Remove Possibility to Block IpAccessHostPool


The command to block IpAccessHostPool has been removed to prevent
blocking of IpAccessHostPool by mistake.

2.11.13 Unique Logical Name for WCDMA


The node Unique Logical Name (ULN) used in license handling, can serve as an
alternative node identity source for DU Radio Node. ULN is the only method to
be used for Baseband Radio Node. For more information, refer to Licenses and
Hardware Activation Codes in Ericsson Software Model.

2.11.14 Improved IRAT and/or IFHO Selection Handling


This system improvement includes the following two parts:

— Evaluation of hoType based on the Best Cell of the Active Set.

— Ability to configure that only the selected handover type is attempted.

The use of CM is reduced when started as late as possible. As a result, the number
of dropped calls can be reduced, resources saved, and throughput improved. With
the new configuration option, unwanted handovers can be avoided.

For more information about the feature, refer to Handover.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 111


Basic Features

2.11.15 Improved PM Handling


Performance Management (PM) handling is moved to a new process to
increase PM capacity for a large Radio Network Subsystem (RNS). This change
also contributes to overall Operation and Maintenance (O&M) resource use
improvement, allowing for more efficient PM and Configuration Management
(CM) handling.

For more information, refer to Performance Management in WCDMA.

2.11.16 Visualize Ericsson Radio System Market Names


This system improvement focuses on the implementation of market name for
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs), for example, radio units, Auxiliary Multiplexing
Unit (XMU), Transport Connectivity Unit (TCU), and support unit.

2.11.17 HSDPA User DL CE Cost Adaptation for Baseband 52-Series


The Downlink (DL) Channel Element (CE) cost for the Baseband Radio Node is
reduced. This improvement is applicable to RNC and Baseband Radio Node.

2.11.18 RBS 6000 with AIR 32 Multi Band Configurations


The system improvement RBS 6000 with AIR 32 Multi Band Configurations
supports two radio units in one FRU. Therefore, one Antenna Integrated Radio
(AIR) 32 unit can support two different bands, which can be configured for two
different Radio Access Technologies (RATs) or for the same RAT.

The active part of the introduced AIR 32 unit supports Band 2 and Band 7. Band
2 is applicable for LTE FDD, WCDMA, and GSM, whereas Band 7 is for LTE only.

The passive part of the unit supports Band 66A for LTE/WCDMA.

For more information about AIR 32 Multi Band configurations, refer to RBS
Configurations.

2.11.19 RBS 6601 V2 Configurations


With this improvement, the following configurations are supported:

— Single RBS 6601 support system, variant 2, equipped with two DUW 11 as
separate nodes

— Single RBS 6601 support system, variant 2, equipped with two DUs in multi-
standard configuration

When one of the two DUs is DUW, it must be DUW 11.

112 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Dual RBS 6601 support system, variant 2, equipped with DUs in multi-
standard configuration

One DUW must be DUW 11. For more information, refer to WCDMA RBS
Configuration Guidelines.

2.11.20 Power 6302


This system improvement introduces a new AC power conversion module, Power
6302, for rail-mounted macro radios. The module serves up to three radios.

For details about Power 6302, refer to Power Description.

2.11.21 Optimized Management of Support Units


This system improvement enables remote and simplified management of
support system unit Power 6302 and built-in support units. These units support
autonomous control of voltage, climate, battery charging, and external alarms.

2.11.22 Support for Enclosure 6320


Software support is introduced for the new small main-remote radio node
Enclosure 6320.

For details on Enclosure 6320, refer to RBS Description.

2.11.23 Optimization of SFTP Characteristics


This system improvement improves the file transfer speed and memory usage of
SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP). With this improvement, the download speed
of the SFTP client on a DU Radio Node and RNC node is enhanced.

The improvement applies to DUW 11, DUW 31, DUW 41, RBS 6501 and EVO
Controller 8200/RNC.

2.11.24 Radio 2212 in Ericsson Radio System


This system improvement introduces a new radio product, Radio 2212, in
Ericsson Radio System. For the configuration of Radio 2212, refer to RBS
Configurations.

2.11.25 Radio 2219 in Ericsson Radio System


This system improvement introduces a new radio product, Radio 2219, in
Ericsson Radio System. For the configuration of Radio 2219, refer to RBS
Configurations.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 113


Basic Features

2.11.26 Reduced Radio Unit Power Consumption


This system improvement supports the dynamic selection of the radio power
class, based on the number of activated carriers. The radio power consumption is
decreased by selecting a lower power class when carriers are released.

2.11.27 Updated Parameter Default Values for RNC and RBS


Default values of selected parameters are now changed and aligned with the
latest recommendations. The improvement includes the following:

— 22 RBS parameter default values are changed to the recommended values.

— 126 RNC parameter default values are changed to the recommended values,
and 8 RNC parameter recommended values are updated.

More information on all the updated parameters can be found in Flow of Users in
WCDMA Radio Networks.

2.11.28 Prioritized CS Setup during PS Inactivity


The improvement prioritizes Circuit Switched (CS) setup by preventing inactivity-
trigged downswitch from the following Packet Switched (PS) user inactivity
actions:

— Downswitch to CELL_FACH or URA_PCH

— Release of a PS RAB (for 2xPS or 3xPS)

— Release to Idle Mode – for a call through Iur or at release with redirect to LTE

The improvement enables the following:

— Improving the speech call setup time

— Improving the speech accessibility

With the improvement triggered, PS resources are not released, to secure faster
and more robust speech setup.

This System Improvement is applicable to all RNC types. For more information,
refer to Channel Switching.

2.11.29 WCDMA Support for Changed CPRI Delay


WCDMA Support for Changed CPRI Delay delay handling improves WCDMA RBS
handling of large CPRI delay changes. Such large CPRI delay changes can, for
example, occur in situations where a CPRI ring MUX architecture is used for
connecting digital units (DU) with remote radio units and the path between the

114 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

DU and remote radio units is changed. The radio node monitors and detects CPRI
link delay changes. If a large CPRI delay is detected, the radio node requests that
the affected path is reconfigured with the new CPRI link delay.

2.11.30 DL BLER Measurement Ordered for all Transport Channels in RES


The improvement modifies the way of activation DL Block Error Rate (BLER)
measurement in Radio Environment Statistics (RES) functionality. The Radio
Resource Control (RRC) measurement reports contain all transport channels
results so this behavior is the same as for Cell Traffic Recording (CTR) and UE
Traffic Recording (UETR).

2.11.31 Inter Vendor HSDPA Serving Cell Change over Iur


This improvement introduces an alternative procedure for intra-Drift Radio
Network System (intra-DRNS) High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) Cell
Change. This improves the interoperability with other vendors. This improvement
applies only to Iur links from other vendor (non-Ericsson) RNCs.

For more information, refer to Handover.

2.11.32 Reduced Setup Time from Cell DCH, Faster Time to Content
The system improvement defines new default value and recommended value of
Dedicated Channel (DCH) frame synchronization parameters uto and toAWEUl
for PS Interactive/Background.

The speech call setup time is reduced, when the UE is in CELL_DCH with a PS
bearer, at the setup of speech, and time to content for DL PS data is reduced
when establishing a PS bearer in CELL_DCH. The latency reduction is up to 160
ms in one side. When the FAJ 121 4561: Direct Upswitch for Speech feature is
used, the latency gain can be obtained also for UE units in URA_PCH.

Reducing the frame synchronization setting for PS can cause an


increase of the counters pmNoDchUlDataFramesOutsideWindow and
pmNoUlDchDiscardedDataFramesL. As the Uplink (UL) most commonly is in Soft
Handover, no network impact can be seen if frames from the other legs reaches
the RNC in time. To assure no negative impact, KPIs for PS retainability and
throughput can be monitored.

2.11.33 Eight WCDMA Carrier Support for RUS 03


This system improvement introduces new multi-standard radio, RUS 03. The
RBBs with RUS 03 support up to eight WCDMA carriers.

For more information about RUS 03 and its RBBs, refer to RBS Configurations.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 115


Basic Features

2.11.34 PDU 0301 Functionality


Alarms are introduced when the e-fuse is tripped. Also, it is now possible to
remotely turn on and off a Power Distribution Unit (PDU) output with the e-fuse.

2.11.35 Simplified RAN Parameter Handling


This system improvement provides a RAN CPI document describing the Ericsson
Reference Configuration (ERC).

The ERC contains reference configuration for WRAN nodes. It is a subset


of parameters and their recommended values specified in Radio Network
Parameters. The main purpose of the ERC is to set the parameters in a node
to the recommended values.

The provided ERC files are used by the OSS for applying the configuration in
RAN. The time needed to apply the configuration profile in the network depends
on the node size, for example, the number of MO instances that need to be
updated.

The ERC is divided into the following files:

— Basic ERC

— Uplink interference ERC

The basic ERC file contains important configuration parameters that do not
require any feature activation and ensure a steady flow of users in the network.
For more information, refer to Flow of Users in WCDMA Radio Networks.

The uplink interference ERC profile can be deployed on the entire network
to enable features related to uplink interference and ensure robust uplink
interference handling.

2.11.36 Restart Improvements


The RNC restart mechanism is enhanced with a more robust restart mechanism
of the switches. One switchplan is always up, ensuring that sync is not lost due to
the restart.

2.11.37 Support for Baseband R503


Baseband R503 is supported in Baseband nodes. Baseband R503 is typically
used to expand the number of CPRI ports. Three splitter blocks in Baseband
R503 are supported, enabling up to 12 CPRI ports between Baseband R503 and
radio units. Up to six Baseband R503 may be connected to one Baseband unit.

116 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.11.38 Reduced Restart Times at Loss of CPRI O&M Link


The total restart time is decreased in cases where the O&M link between the
DUW or Baseband and the Radio Unit is unavailable for a period longer than 90
seconds. The decreased restart time is approximately in the range of 20 to 80
seconds. The scenarios may for example be cold restarts, long Radio Unit cascade
chains or general CPRI problems.

2.12 FAJ 121 4602: System Improvements in WRAN W17


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W17 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 7 Node Support for FAJ 121 4602: System Improvements in WRAN W17
Release
System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband
Node Radio Node
Improved Handover Handling X N/A N/A
Strong Ciphers for SFTP X X X
Default Value Update W17A X X X
Increased PS RAB Support in N/A X X
HS-TXM
Improved Alarm Text for DU N/A X X
Radio Node
Improved Handling of 4TX N/A N/A X
Radios in WCDMA RAN
Default Value Update RNC X N/A N/A
W17Q2
AIR 2488 in Ericsson Radio N/A X X
System
Remove Parameter pwrOffset X N/A N/A
Paging Retransmission for UE X N/A N/A
State Change
Allow Soft Congestion for X N/A N/A
Fractional-DPCH Users
Reduced EUL Reconfiguration N/A N/A X
Rejection

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 117


Basic Features

System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband


Node Radio Node
Automatic Detection and X N/A N/A
Solution of SIB11 Overflow
Default Value Update RBS N/A X X
W17Q2
Enhanced Supervision of X X X
Multiple Nodes in a Site
Support for Baseband 6620 and N/A N/A X
6630
Unified Management of N/A X N/A
Enclosure and Power System
Update of Recommended Values X N/A N/A
for SIB Scheduling
Observability of Cabinet Climate N/A X X
Status
Environmental Log, Counters N/A X X
TTFaF ENodeB Wall Clock N/A N/A X
Alignment
Hardware Sensitive Install N/A N/A X
ECT Initial Configuration N/A N/A X
Support
Observability of Abnormal High N/A X X
Fan Speed
Cell Reselection During Security X N/A N/A
Enable RSCP Threshold for X N/A N/A
Inter-Frequency Cell Reselection
Update of Default Settings X N/A N/A
for GSM Handover and Cell
Reselection
Update of Default Values for SIB X N/A N/A
Parameters
Change of Soft Congestion X N/A N/A
Parameter
MO Browser View N/A N/A X
Improved Baseband HWAC N/A N/A X
Enforcement
WCDMA Baseband Reset N/A N/A X
Improved Fault Finding N/A X X
Enhanced Frame Sync
Observability

118 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System Improvement RNC DU Radio Baseband


Node Radio Node
Evo Robustness with IP Access X N/A N/A
Host
Software Support for EvoC 8300 X N/A N/A
Enhanced Frame Protocol N/A X X
Reordering

2.12.1 Unified Management of Enclosure and Power System


With the system improvement Unified Management of Enclosure and Power
System, the following can be achieved:

— Enable modeling power system and 19-inch rack as cabinets.

— Provide a plug and play solution for support system units.

— Introduce remote management support for power system.

For configuration guidelines and example files, refer to WCDMA RBS


Configuration Guidelines, Example Files for Site Equipment Configuration, and
Example Files for Modify RBS Equipment Configuration.

2.12.2 Improved Handover Handling


This system improvement introduces a new algorithm to select the best cell
during the serving High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) cell change.
For more information, refer to Handover.

2.12.3 AIR 2488 in Ericsson Radio System


The system improvement AIR 2488 in Ericsson Radio System introduces a
detachable Antenna Integrated Radio unit, AIR 2488. Two optional ARUSs
use one combiner to share AIR internal antenna. This system improvement is
applicable for DU Radio Nodes and Baseband Radio Nodes. For information
about AIR 2488, refer to Antenna Integrated Radio Unit Description.

2.12.4 Strong Ciphers for SFTP


This system improvement introduces stronger ciphers for the SSH File Transfer
Protocol (SFTP) client, which support key agreement, encryption, and integrity
protection. This improves the transfer security of SFTP when the node is acting as
a client.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 119


Basic Features

2.12.5 Default Value Update W17A


Selected parameters’ default value for RNC, DU Radio Node and Baseband Radio
Node has been updated. This is in line with the Ericsson Zero Touch concept.
Default values ensures stable performance, without making any assumptions on
activated features. The change of the default value will not override current set
configurations when upgrading, i e an attribute set value prior to the upgrade
will remain set to the old value. The default values sometimes deviates from
the recommended values, the recommended values can give additional increased
performance depending on the Network configuration and features activated.
This is further described per feature and in the guidelines, for example Flow of
Users. It is recommended to update also existing nodes to the default values to
get maximal stability, and later on use recommended features and parameter
settings to get optimal performance.

All radio network parameters can be found in Parameter and Feature


Recommendations.

2.12.6 Increased PS RAB Support in HS-TXM


This system improvement enhances the capacity of High Speed TX Modules
(HS-TXMs) by 50% to support more PS RABs for each HS-TXM. With this
improvement, one HS-TXM can support as many HS users as before even when
each user consumes one more RAB, for example, one for Signaling Radio Bearer
(SRB) on HS + Two for EUL/HS RABs.

2.12.7 Improved Alarm Text for DU Radio Node


Improvements related to how alarms are presented have been implemented in
this release. The naming style for DU Radio Node support system alarms, which
are common for WCDMA and LTE, has been aligned with the naming style in
Baseband Radio Nodes, by adding spaces between words in Specific Problem.

2.12.8 Improved Handling of 4TX Radios in WCDMA RAN


With the system improvement, three carriers can be configured with equal power
and the power of all four Transmit Power Amplifiers (TPAs) can be used on a 4TX
radio or a 4TX Radio Building Block (RBB). This also applies to other cases with
odd number of carriers on 4TX radios and RBBs. For each TX branch, the power
associated with a TX that has unequally mapped multiple carriers can be split
between the carriers.

2.12.9 Default Value Update RNC W17.Q2


The default values of selected parameters for RNC have been updated. This is in
line with the Ericsson Zero Touch concept.

120 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Default values ensure stable performance, without making any assumptions on


activated features.The change of the default value does not override the currently
set configurations during the upgrade, that is an attribute set to a value before
the upgrade remains set to the old value

New default values are applied in following cases:

— At new installation of EvoController 8200/RNC

— For EvoController 8200/RNC in operation, when:

• a new MO is created, for example, at node expansion

• an existing MO is deleted and re-created and no other value is explicitly


set.

An upgrade of EvoController 8200/RNC does not affect the value of existing


parameters.

This system improvement modifies a number of radio network parameters’


default value to align them with latest recommendations. Aligning default values
to recommended values is not possible for all parameters, as the recommended
values in some cases depend on activation of optional features.The default
values can be different from the recommended values, the recommended
values can give additional increased performance, depending on the network
configuration and activated features. This is further described for each feature
and in the guidelines, for example in Flow of Users in WCDMA Radio Networks.
To achieve maximum stability, it is recommended to update also existing nodes
to the default values, and later on, use recommended feature and parameter
settings, to get optimal performance

For information on all radio network parameters, see Parameter and Feature
Recommendations.

2.12.10 AIR 2488 in Ericsson Radio System


This system improvement introduces one new Antenna Integrated Radio (AIR),
AIR 2488, and one new RBB, RBB24_1C. AIR 2488 consists of one or two
detachable radio units, Radio 2488, and two integrated antennas. The two Radio
2488 units are placed in the AIR container and share the antennas integrated
in the container. AIR 2488 supports the following configurations to achieve a
flexible field site deployment:

— Two Radio 2488 and one external radio

— One Radio 2488 and two external radios

— One Radio 2488 and one external radio

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 121


Basic Features

The external radios must be B7 remote radios. When configuring the site with
AIR 2488, AIR 2488 is treated as an ordinary remote radio unit rather than an
AIR unit.

This system improvement is applicable to DU Radio Nodes and Baseband Radio


Nodes, with RBS 6101, RBS 6102, RBS 6110, RBS 6120, RBS 6201, RBS 6202,
RBS 6301, RBS 6302, RBS 6501, and RBS 6601.

For information about AIR 2488, refer to the following documents:

— Antenna Integrated Radio Unit Description

— Antenna and RF Connections

— Example Files for Site Equipment Configuration

2.12.11 Remove Parameter pwrOffset


This system improvement increases voice accessibility by turning off Congestion
Control for DL HS and non-HS power.

2.12.12 Paging Retransmission for UE State Change


The Paging Retransmission for UE State Change goal is to improve a number
of successful CS paging attempts for UE in URA_PCH state or reduce CS call
setup time in affected scenarios. During reconfiguration of UE from URA_PCH to
CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH this enhanced paging procedure is used. RNC waits
for UE reconfiguration procedure completion and then send additional PAGING
TYPE2 message. Additional PAGING TYPE2 message covers the scenario when
PAGING TYPE1 is lost due to UE state change. New counter is introduced to
monitor number of additional PAGINT TYPE2 messages.

2.12.13 Allow Soft Congestion for Fractional-DPCH Users


This system improvement enables non-guaranteed HS F-DPCH users to be
targeted by Soft Congestion, if there is a shortage of DL power or DL ASE.
Increased probability of finding a target for soft congestion increases CS
accessibility in the network at high load. The improvement is activated when
“Enhanced HSDPA Soft Congestion” (FAJ 121 1830) is activated

2.12.14 Reduced EUL Reconfiguration Rejection


This improvement enhances interoperability with other network vendors, by
reducing the amount of EUL reconfiguration rejections in handover scenarios.

122 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.12.15 Automatic Detection and Solution of SIB11 Overflow


This system improvement introduces a new algorithm for building and updating
SIB11. This algorithm makes sure that the size limit is kept and cells do not
become disabled when too many neighbors are defined. The least prioritized
neighbor relations are removed automatically at SIB11 overflow, avoiding the
need for manual intervention. In case the SIB11 exceeds the SIB size limit, a new
GPEH event INTERNAL_SIB11_NCELL_INFO is reported.

For more information, refer to General Performance Event Handling and


Additional WCDMA Carrier Deployment.

2.12.16 Observability of Cabinet Climate Status


This system improvement provides data to analyze climate status in RBS
cabinets over time, identify installation problems and prevent downtime due to
inadequate climate conditions.

2.12.17 Default Value Update RBS W17.Q2


The default values of selected parameters for RBS have been updated. This is in
line with the Ericsson Zero Touch concept.

Default values ensure stable performance, without making any assumptions


on activated features. The change of the default value does not override the
currently set configurations during the upgrade, that is an attribute set to a value
before the upgrade remains set to the old value.

This system improvement modifies a number of radio network parameters’


default value to align them with latest recommendations. Aligning default values
to recommended values is not possible for all parameters, as the recommended
values in some cases depend on activation of optional features.The default
values can be different from the recommended values, the recommended
values can give additional increased performance, depending on the network
configuration and activated features. This is further described for each feature
and in the guidelines, for example in Flow of Users in WCDMA Radio Networks.
To achieve maximum stability, it is recommended to update also existing nodes
to the default values, and later on, use recommended feature and parameter
settings, to get optimal performance.

For information on all radio network parameters, refer to Parameter and Feature
Recommendations.

2.12.18 Enhanced Supervision of Multiple Nodes in a Site


This system improvement enables grouping radio nodes and viewing them as
one network element.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 123


Basic Features

It enables a quicker assessment of the performance on the site, especially when


multiple radio nodes are located in the same geographical area.

For more information, refer to Radio Network Configuration and Parameter and
Feature Recommendations.

2.12.19 Support for Baseband 6620 and 6630


Software support is provided for Baseband 6620 and Baseband 6630.

For more information, see RBS Configurations.

2.12.20 Unified Management of Enclosure and Power System


With the system improvement Unified Management of Enclosure and Power
System, the following can be achieved:

— Enable modeling power system and 19-inch rack as cabinets.

— Provide a plug and play solution for support system units.

— Introduce remote management support for power system.

2.12.21 Update of Recommended Values for SIB Scheduling


The recommended values of SIB Scheduling for RNC have been updated. This is
in line with the Ericsson Zero Touch concept.

The recommended values enable network expansion where the amount of


broadcasted information is increased, for example when activating new features,
without adjusting the sibxRepPeriod or sibxStartPos values.

The recommended values for SIB schedule handle the combinations of the
following feature activations:

— Access Class Barring

— Domain Specific Access Class Barring

— Paging Permission with Access Control

— CS Voice Fallback from LTE with Deferred Measurement Control Reading

— LTE Cell Reselection SIB19 (max 8 LTE frequencies defined or max 4 LTE
frequencies if LTE

— Cell Reselection for Advanced LTE Deployments in enabled

— SIB18 for Improved Inter PLMN Mobility

124 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— EUL/HS-FACH

These new recommended values enable optimized SIB3 setting for fast call setup
time using CS Fallback from LTE.

The optimized setting results in a faster SIB acquisition also when DMCR is not
activated in the cell, compared to using of old recommended values for DMCR.

More information and the list of updated parameters can be found in Idle Mode
and Common Channel Behavior.

2.12.22 Environmental Log


This system improvement enables observation of power related data in RBS
Cabinets. New PM counters are available for analyzing and monitoring system
DC voltage, AC input voltage interruptions, and power load. It also introduces
history logging of the status of the power, fan speed, and temperature in the
RBS6000. The data is logged on the node and is stored into log the files every
24h and upon raise of alarm Main Load Disconnect. The intention of this
improvement is to increase the possibility to analyze and the knowledge about
the problems occurring in the node at abnormal environmental DU/RU operating
conditions. System data observation and logging allows for early detection of
problems and reduces time for trouble shooting.

2.12.23 TTFaF ENodeB Wall Clock Alignment


This system improvement ensures that the central time in a Baseband Radio
Node is synchronized with RU/XMU.

This ensures synchronized timestamps in the logs, which simplifies fault tracing.
The maximum allowed deviation between these timestamps is 1 s. All logs are
affected by this function.

2.12.24 Hardware Sensitive Install


Hardware Sensitive Install reduces the amount of software downloaded to a
Radio node. With this functionality, the entire Upgrade Package does not have to
be downloaded from the remote server during an upgrade procedure. Only those
Load Container Module files are downloaded which are required by the installed
hardware.

2.12.25 ECT Initial Configuration Support


The Equipment Configuration Tool (ECT) validates Baseband Radio Node
configuration files. Both NETCONF and DSL file formats are supported. It also
supports the handling of substitution parameters, which enables the user to
configure multiple Radio Nodes on different sites.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 125


Basic Features

This enhancement enables the ECT to create the Site Basic and Site Equipment
files with less input parameters.

For more information, see Manage Equipment Configuration Tool and Manage
Configuration Files.

2.12.26 Observability of Abnormal High Fan Speed


The system improvement allows for the supervision of abnormally high fan speed
in cabinets. An alarm is raised if the condition is fulfilled for over a configured
amount of time.

For more information on the alarm, refer to Fan Speed Continuously High.

2.12.27 Cell Reselection During Security


With this system improvement, a cell reselection is activated by default during
the security procedure.

2.12.28 Enable RSCP Threshold for Inter-Frequency Cell Reselection


With this system improvement, the operator no longer needs to enable the
FAJ 121 1055: Hierarchical Cell Structures feature to configure and use the
Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) threshold (UtranCell::sInterSearch)
when starting Inter-frequency measurements for cell reselection. The RSCP
threshold for IEF cell reselection is always included in SIB3 Information Element
if sSearchHcs > 0.

This improves the “Sticky Carrier” when the operator uses RSCP as the quality
measurement of Cell Reselections. For more information, refer to Idle Mode and
Common Channel Behavior and Additional WCDMA Carrier Deployment.

2.12.29 Update of Default Settings for GSM Handover and Cell Reselection
The default value of selected parameters for RNC have been updated, in line with
the Ericsson Zero Touch concept.

Default values ensure stable performance, without making any assumptions on


the activated features. User-defined values remain the same, only the default
values are changed.

This system improvement modifies the default value of the


ExternalGsmCell::qRxLevMin parameter which is related to the GSM
Handover and Cell Reselection (FAJ 121 154) feature, to align it with latest
recommendations.

126 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.12.30 Update of Default Values for SIB Parameters


The default values of selected parameters for RNC have been updated, in line
with the Ericsson Zero Touch concept. Default values ensure stable performance,
without making any assumptions on activated features. User-defined values
remain the same, only the default values are changed.

This system improvement modifies the default value of the System Information
Block (SIB) parameters to align it with latest recommendations. Aligning the
default values to the recommended values is not possible for all parameters, as
in some cases, the recommended values depend on the activation of optional
features.The default values can be different from the recommended values. The
recommended values can give additional increased performance, depending on
the network configuration and the activated features. This is further described
for each feature and in the guidelines, for example in Flow of Users in WCDMA
Radio Networks. To achieve maximum stability, it is recommended to update the
existing nodes to the default values, and later on, use the recommended feature
and parameter settings, to get optimal performance.

The default value of the following System Information Block (SIB) parameters
are changed :

— sb1RepPeriod

— sb1StartPos

— sib1RepPeriod

— sib1StartPos

— sib11StartPos

— sib12RepPeriod

— sib12StartPos

— sib18RepPeriod

— sib18StartPos

— sib19RepPeriod

— sib19StartPos

— sib2RepPeriod

— sib2StartPos

— sib3RepPeriod

— sib3StartPos

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 127


Basic Features

— sib5RepPeriod

— sib5StartPos

— sib7RepPeriod

— sib7StartPos

For information on all radio network parameters, refer to Parameter and Feature
Recommendations.

2.12.31 Change of Soft Congestion Parameter


With this system improvement, the parameter
RabHandling::maxAllowedGbrUlPsSpeech, used to control soft
congestion functionality, is replaced with a new parameter
RncFunction::softCongestionAllModules. The new parameter has a more
suitable name and value range. This helps to reduce the confusion of having a
parameter with a name different to its functionality.

2.12.32 MO Browser View


This system improvement provides a graphical user interface tool. View of MO
Browser examining the complete node configuration performing troubleshooting,
not only the equipment parts.

2.12.33 Support for 300 Iur Links


This system improvement increases the maximum number of the IurLink MO
instances in RNC from 128 to 300. This increases the maximum number of
defined external RNCs.

The maximum number of the Rnsap MO instances is increased from 128 to 200.
This facilitates a maximum of 200 external RNCs being connected over Iur, to
perform various actions, such as soft handover to external cells. The remaining
100 external RNCs are configured to enable Core Network Hard Handover
(CNHHO) to the cells controlled by these RNCs.

More information on the CNHHO can be found in Handover.

2.12.34 Improved Fault Finding Enhanced Frame Sync Observability


The following two PM counters are introduced to better observe DCH frame
synchronization over Iub:

— IubDataStreams::pmDchFramesEarly: Number of DCH Iub FP frames that


arrive after ToAE, but before ToAWS

128 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— IubDataStreams::pmDchFramesTooEarly: Number of DCH Iub FP frames


that are discarded because they arrive too early, that is, before ToAE

The counters facilitate troubleshooting of frame synchronization problems.

For more information about frame synchronization, refer to Synchronization.

2.12.35 Improved Baseband HWAC Enforcement


This system improvement brings the following changes:
— The maximum Baseband HWAC level is increased for different Baseband
radio nodes with the following configurations:
— WCDMA single mode on Baseband 5212/6620/6303

— W+G mixed mode on both Baseband 5216/6630 and Baseband


5212/6620/6303

— L+W/L+G/L+W+G mixed mode on Baseband 5216/6630

— The minimum Baseband HWAC level is increased for Baseband 5216/6630


with L+W+G configuration.

When the current Baseband HWAC level is lower than the minimum level,
during node upgrading to 17.Q4 or later version, the alarm Resource
Allocation Failure with additional text Unable to allocate baseband HW
resources due to insufficient baseband HWAC for this RAT is raised. In this
case, a new LKF with higher Baseband HWAC level is needed.

— The total uplink CE under HWAC level 4 is reduced from 2048 to 960 for
Baseband 5216/6630 with L+W configuration. To keep the uplink CE 2048
after upgrading to 17.Q4 or later version, HWAC level 6 or above needs to be
installed.

— Baseband HWACs do not limit cell carrier capacity. The number of HSDPA
cells on one Baseband radio node is limited by the number of available
HS-PDSCH codes in current Baseband HWAC level.

The benefits are the following:


— More capacity is available for Baseband radio nodes.

— More cells can be enabled since cell carrier capacity is not limited by
Baseband HWACs.

Note: This benefit can be obtained when cell carrier capacity controlled by
software licensed features higher than what controlled by Baseband
HWACs before node upgrading.

For more information, see Licenses and Hardware Activation Codes in Ericsson
Software Model.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 129


Basic Features

2.12.36 WCDMA Baseband Reset


Baseband restart provides a first level recovery action for faults occurring in
Baseband software layer 1 or layer 2. In case of a fault, only layer 1 and layer 2
software are restarted.

For more information, see Manage Faults

2.12.37 Evo Robustness with IP Access Host


This system improvement issues a new alarm: RncModule_IpHostUnavailable to
inform the operator about non-functioning (for example locked, faulty) or missing
IP access hosts on the EPB.

2.12.38 Software Support for EvoC 8300


Software support is provided for EvoC 8300.

For more information, refer to Node Description.

2.12.39 Enhanced Frame Protocol Reordering


This system improvement enhances the HSDAP flow control handling when
received HSDPA frames are out of sequence. The improvement takes effect only
when frame disorder happens to two adjacent frames, for example, the following
FSN sequence: …,0x5,0x6,0x7,0x9,0x8,0xA,0xB,0xC…

This system improvement brings the following performance changes:

— Enhanced HSDPA flow control, which can be observed by the following


counters:

• pmCapAllocIubHsLimitingRatioSpiXX

• pmHsDataFramesLostSpiXX

• pmHsDataFramesReceivedSpiXX

• pmIubFrameLossIntensity

Note: The XX suffix represents the priority class and can range from 00 to
15.

— Increased HSDPA throughput, which can be observed by the following


counter calculation results through the command pmr with AMOS access to
node:

• PSHsAvgTputPerCell

• PSHsAvgTputPerPq

130 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

• PSHsTputPerSpiXX

• PSHsTputPerSpiXXPq

Note: These results belong to HsDschResources performance group. The


XX suffix represents the priority class and can range from 00 to 15.

2.13 FAJ 121 4836: System Improvements in WRAN W18


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W18 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 8 Node Support for FAJ 121 4836: System Improvements in WRAN W18
Release
System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio
Improvement Node
EMGUI User N/A N/A X
Name and
Password Log-in
CPRI Fault N/A N/A X
Management
Radio 4426 in N/A X N/A
Ericsson Radio
Systems
Support for Radio N/A X N/A
2242 Band 1
Support for Radio N/A X N/A
4442 Band 1
HsDschResources N/A X N/A
Counter
Improvement
Administrative N/A N/A X
Support
Default Value X N/A N/A
Update RNC
W18Q2
WCDMA N/A N/A X
Baseband Reset
Antenna N/A X N/A
Performance

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 131


Basic Features

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
VSWR
Diagnostics
Support
Support for Radio N/A X X
2468
EMGUI Support N/A N/A X
for Shared Mixed
Mode
Other Changed X N/A N/A
Behaviors in RNC
(W18.Q2)
Smart PSU Load N/A X X
Sharing
EMGUI N/A N/A X
Authorization
Support
Automatic Single N/A N/A X
RAT Restart on
Multi-Standard
Nodes
Evo Robustness X N/A
with IP Access
Host
Improved N/A NA X
Synchronization
Reference
Supervision
Graceful Radio N/A X X
Power Back-Off
Improved System N/A X N/A
Time
Synchronization
between DU and
RUs
Health Check N/A N/A X
Management
Steered HS N/A N/A X
Allocation
Additional Text N/A X X
and procedure
alignment for HW
Fault and General
HW Error

132 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Support for N/A X N/A
Commscope ™
CommRET v2
Mirroring Alarms N/A X N/A
on Secondary
Nodes
Automatic X X X
Deletion of
SctpAssociation
MO after Restart/
Upgrade
Spare Parameter X N/A N/A
Handling; Replace
Parameters
EMCLI N/A N/A X
Installation
Update
EMGUI Schematic N/A N/A X
View
Improvement,
More ENM
Alignments
Hardware N/A X N/A
Runtime
Supervision for
Internal Ethernet
Links
WCDMA Node X X N/A
Health Check
Other Changed X N/A N/A
Behaviors in RNC
(18.Q3)
External N/A N/A X
Interference
Detection, DUS
Observability
RNC Support for X N/A N/A
Dual Baseband
UL Throughput N/A N/A X
for Resource-
Limited Users -
PM Counters

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 133


Basic Features

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Support FTP over N/A N/A X
TLS (FTPES)
Dual Baseband N/A N/A X
Energy Efficient N/A N/A X
Baseband
Configuration
Other Changed X N/A N/A
Behaviors in RNC
(18.Q4)
EMGUI Edit MO N/A N/A X
Attributes
EMCLI Installer N/A N/A X
GUI
Enhancements
Eco Climate Mode N/A N/A X
Local X N/A N/A
Authentication
and Authorization
for SL1 and SL2
Improved N/A X X
Synchronization
Reference
Supervision
Renewal of N/A X X
Certificates Based
on OldCertID
Configurable N/A X X
Vertical
Beamwidth

2.13.1 EMGUI User Name and Password Log-in


A new password storage protection is implemented. Node password is protected
using salted SHA-512 hashing.

To prevent users from being locked out, migration to the new storage algorithm
provides automatic switch from using existing algorithm to new algorithm.

After system upgrade, the following effects are expected:


— Existing node passwords continue to work as before.

— When logging in with an existing password, the following message can be


displayed:

134 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

The password could be compromised. Please,change the password.

— It is strongly advised to change password, and the new password is


protected with SHA-512 based password protection.

— Following password update, going back to software levels before 18.Q1


release, results in the alarm Password File Fault. In this case, user needs
to reset password, following related alarm OPI.

2.13.2 CPRI Fault Management


This system improvement improves fault management for CPRI link in the
following ways:

— Remove alarms that requires no actions

— Provide more accurate information about the fault location

2.13.3 Radio 4426 in Ericsson Radio Systems


This system improvement introduces a high-performance radio, Radio 4426
Band 66 for WCDMA. Radio 4426 supports a higher output power of up to 240 W
to achieve a good balance between cost and performance.

Radio 4426 is supported on RBS 6101, RBS 6102, RBS 6110, RBS 6120, RBS
6201, RBS 6202, RBS 6301, RBS 6302, RBS 6320, RBS 6501, and RBS 6601.

For information about software dependencies, refer to Compatibilities for


Hardware and Software. For more information on hardware, refer to Radio
Description.

2.13.4 Support for Radio 2242 Band 1


Software support for Radio 2242 Band 1 is introduced for WCDMA. From the
WCDMA side, Radio 2242 supports the following band configurations:

— Band 1 for WCDMA (Band 3 is not used.)

— Band 1 for WCDMA + Band 3 for LTE

— Band 1 for WCDMA + Band 3 for GSM

— Band 1 for WCDMA + Band 1 for LTE + Band 3 for LTE

For more information about Radio 2242, refer to Radio Description and RBS
Configurations.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 135


Basic Features

2.13.5 Support for Radio 4442 Band 1


Software support for Radio 4442 Band 1 is introduced for WCDMA. From the
WCDMA side, Radio 4442 supports the following band configurations:

— Band 1 for WCDMA (Band 3 is not used.)

— Band 1 for WCDMA + Band 3 for LTE

— Band 1 for WCDMA + Band 1 for LTE + Band 3 for LTE

For more information about Radio 4442, refer to Radio Description and Radio
Node Configurations.

2.13.6 HsDschResources Counter Improvement


In earlier releases, the following HsDschResources counters had a null value if
no user data was transmitted during a ROP period. Under the same condition, the
value is 1 or 0.

— pmSumNoOfUsersSpi00 to 15

— pmSumDelaySpi00 to 15

— pmSumJitterSpi00 to 15

— pmSumTransmittedBitsSpi00 to 15

— pmNoActiveSubFramesSpi00 to 15

— pmNoInactiveRequiredSubFramesSpi00 to 15

— pmSumNonEmptyUserBuffersSpi00 to 15

— pmSumAckedBitsPqSpi00 to 15

— pmSumNonEmptyUserBuffersPqSpi00 to 15

— pmSumNonEmptyUserBuffersMcPqSpi00 to 15

— pmSumNonEmptyUserBuffers3McPqSpi00 to 15

— pmSumAckedBitsMcPqSpi00 to 15

— pmSumAckedBits3McPqSpi00 to 15

2.13.7 Administrative Support


This system improvement brings the following benefits:

136 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Allows the operator to block unwanted alarms on RiPort and dependent MOs
during CPRI installation.

— Introduces mechanism comparing SFP product number with the pre-


configured preferred product number. In case of a product number validation
fail, an immediate alarm on warning level is raised.

2.13.8 Default Value Update RNC W18.Q2


The default values of selected parameters for RNC have been updated. This is in
line with the Ericsson Zero Touch concept. This system improvement is applicable
to Evo Controller 8200/RNC.

For information on all radio network parameters, refer to Parameter and Feature
Recommendations.

The default values of the following parameters are changed:

— Rrc::cfnOffsetMarginFirstRabEstSrbHs (from 0 to 75)

— Rrc::cfnOffsetMarginSrbHs (from 0 to 75)

— Paging::utranDrxCycleLength (from 6 to 5)

— UtranCell::dmcrEnabled (from FALSE to TRUE)

— UtranCell::sf16Adm (from 1 to 0)

— UtranCell::sf16gAdm (from 1 to 0)

— UtranCell::sf8AdmUl (from 1 to 0)

— UtranCell::sf8gAdmUl (from 1 to 0)

2.13.9 Improved Restart Time - Phased C1 Restart


With this system improvement, the RNC System Downtime is reduced at System
Upgrade/Update and node restart (rank Warm and Cold). During the execution
of node restart, the C1 Evo Processor Boards (EPBs) are restarted in a phased
manner. While the first C1 EPB is restarting, the traffic is handled by the second
C1 EPB and the other boards in the node. When the restart of the first C1 EPB
has completed and its core services are available, the second C1 EPB and the
other boards are restarted.

The core services are available throughout the node restart and Java Virtual
Machine (JVM) downtime is reduced, giving the traffic downtime reduction and
improved In-Service Performance (ISP).

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 137


Basic Features

2.13.10 WCDMA Baseband Reset


The system improvement reduces the number of DU warm restarts caused by I/O
operation limits. Baseband software is restarted when Baseband software fault
or Node B Frame Number (BFN) jump occur. The following situations are treated
as exceptions:

— A fault occurs on the Baseband software layer 2, while I/O operation is


ongoing.

— I/O operation is not finished when layer 2 software stops due to a Baseband
software fault or BFN jump.

For these scenarios, a DU warm restart is also needed.

2.13.11 Antenna Performance VSWR Diagnostics Support


This system improvement adds new PM counters for observability of antenna
performance. These counters help to distinguish alarms caused by low traffic
from those associated with degradation of antenna equipment.

This feature requires DU connected to all radios supporting VSWR supervision or


VSWR Light.

2.13.12 Support for Radio 2468


Software support for Radio 2468 is provided in the following RBS products:

— RBS 6101, RBS 6102, RBS 6110, RBS 6120

— RBS 6201, RBS 6202

— RBS 6301, RBS 6302, RBS 6320

— RBS 6601

Radio 2468 supports the configurations shown in Table 9.

Table 9 Configurations Supported by Radio 2468


Configuration RBB(1) Comment
Two sectors in one radio — RBB12_1E + The FAJ 121 4160:
RBB12_1F Multi-Sector Per Radio
feature must be
activated.
An example for the
DU Radio Node is
provided in Example

138 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Configuration RBB(1) Comment


Files for Site Equipment
Configuration.
One Sector in one radio — RBB12_1E N/A

— RBB12_1F

— RBB22_1F

— RBB24_1C
(1) This column is only for DU Radio Nodes.

For more information, refer to the following documents:

— Radio Description for DU Radio Node and Baseband Radio Node

— RBS Configurations for DU Radio Node and Baseband Radio Node

— Antenna and RF Connections for DU Radio Node and Baseband Radio Node

2.13.13 EMGUI Support for Shared Mixed Mode


This system improvement introduces a visual indication in EMGUI for equipment
shared with other MEs in a mixed mode configuration.

For more information, see Manage EMGUI.

2.13.14 Other Changed Behaviors in RNC (W18.Q2)


Following RNC node behavior changes are included in W18.Q2 Release:

— UEH exception with code 956 visible for non-EUL capable target cells

— Improved handling of Inter Frequency Handover

— Removal of unnecessary UEH exception with code 54 duplicates

— HS Accessibility counters stepped once for each Rab Assignment Request.

2.13.15 Smart PSU Load Sharing


Smart PSU Load Sharing algorithm keeps the PSU load at optimal level and
decreases power consumption. The algorithm also keeps the temperature of PSU
at balanced level. It prevents fans from speeding up and consuming additional
power.

Smart PSU Load Sharing has the following benefits:

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 139


Basic Features

— Total system efficiency is increased.

— System power losses are reduced when system load is low.

— Customer operational expenses are reduced.

— Gain on other power saving features is increased where RBS power


consumption is reduced.

— Broken PSU detection develops at low load level condition.

2.13.16 EMGUI Authorization Support


This system improvement introduces roles to EMGUI. One user can have multiple
roles. User capabilities are limited by the rules and authorities of the roles
assigned to them.

For more information, see Manage EMGUI.

2.13.17 Automatic Single RAT Restart on Multi-Standard Nodes


Previously, when one RAT has software faults, the node restarts directly. With
the system improvement, only the affected RAT restarts, which avoids affecting
the traffic on other RATs. If the software faults persist, the node restarts as the
next step.

Therefore, the robustness of a multi-standard node is improved.

For more information about the automatic single RAT restart, refer to Manage
Faults and Mixed Mode Radio.

2.13.18 Evo Robustness with IP Access Host


With this system improvement, Evo Controller 8200/RNC and EvoC 8300 exclude
RNC modules from the UE context pooling mechanism with non-functioning IP
access hosts.

2.13.19 Improved Synchronization Reference Supervision

This feature improves node group stability by indicating frequency


deviations in external synchronization references, and by preventing these
references from being used for synchronization.

The deviations are visible in the referenceStatus attribute of the


RadioEquipmentClockReference MO. If the value of the attribute is

140 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

FREQ_DEVIATION, the external synchronization reference exceeds the defined


deviation limit and is rejected during synchronization.

2.13.20 Graceful Radio Power Back-Off


The following improvements are introduced when a radio unit detects insufficient
power supply:

— The radio unit performs stepwise RF output power back-off.

— The HSDPA power margin is automatically tuned based on RF output power


back-off.

The improvements bring the following benefits:

— Improved service availability for the affected cells. Without power back-off,
the radio unit may be shut down or work unstably when power supply is
insufficient.

— Reduced hardware damage risk for radio units.

— Better adaptation of HSDPA power margin to the actual radio RF output


power.

The improvements take effect by default after upgrade, and apply to the
following radio units:

— RRUS 32

— AIR 32, AIR 2488

— Radio 2203, Radio 0208, Radio 2212, Radio 2217, Radio 2219, Radio 4415,
Radio 4478

2.13.21 Improved System Time Synchronization between DU and RUs


With the improvement, the system time synchronization between the DU and the
RUs is also triggered when the system time of the DU changes. The improvement
avoids time stamps inconsistency between the DU and the RUs.

2.13.22 Health Check Management


With this improvement, Baseband Radio Node health status is checked and
reported automatically once the health check is initiated.

For detailed information about health check, refer to Manage Node Health Check.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 141


Basic Features

2.13.23 Steered HS Allocation


This system improvement introduces Steered HS Allocation. It is a manual
procedure to allocate HSDPA cores to local cells. Idle or low-loaded cores can
be manually allocated to the high-loaded sectors. After re-allocation of HDSPA
cores, the high-loaded sectors gain increased capacity of HSDPA users.

The increase of served HSDPA users can be observed by the following counters:

— The quotient of pmSumCapacityHsDschUsers/


pmSamplesCapacityHsDschUsers increases.

— The HsDschResources::pmAllocRejHwHsDschUsers counter equals zero.

Note: When migrating to Baseband 6621/6631 from the other types of


boards, deactivate the feature and then reconfigure it on the new
boards.

For more information, refer to Manage Radio Network.

2.13.24 Additional Text and Procedure Alignment for HW Fault and General HW
Error
The system improvement aligns the content of the HW Fault and General
HW Error alarms with the software. The operating instructions are updated
according to the new alarm OPI structure.

In the case of the following fault occurrence, a General SW Error or SW Error


alarm is now raised instead of the previously raised HW Fault alarm:

— Lost connection to PIC Server on DU

— Failure in connection to XpSwSelectionI server on Baseband

— Losing contact with XpSwSelectionI server on Baseband.

2.13.25 Support for Commscope ™ CommRET v2


The DU Radio Node supports Commscope™ CommRET v2. With this system
improvement, the following are enhanced:

— Two DUs can share one AISG Remote Electrical Tilt Unit (RETU).

— Repeated Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) requests from one DU are rejected
when the previous one is being performed.

— RET status is visible with the attribute RetDevice::tiltChangeStatus.

The following operations can only be performed from one DU at a time. When the
operation is being performed, requests from the other DU are rejected.

142 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— RET calibration

— RETU hardware test

— RET configuration

If the RET configuration is being performed from one DU, the later
configuration request from another DU is automatically sent to the RETU
every five minutes. If the request is rejected at the sixth time, the alarm
RetFailure is raised.

2.13.26 Mirroring Alarms on Secondary Nodes


Previously for a site where multiple nodes share the same support system, the
alarms of the support system are only visible on the primary node. This system
improvement enables the secondary nodes to duplicate the alarms from the
primary node. Therefore, the alarms are visible on the primary node and all
secondary nodes.

For more information about how to configure the improvement, refer to Manage
Hardware Equipment.

2.13.27 Automatic Deletion of SctpAssociation MO after Restart/ Upgrade

Node behavior change included in W18.Q2 release.

SctpAssociation MOs are automatically deleted at the restart and created by


the System once the SCTP is available to handle traffic per particular destination.
The actual establishment of the SCTP Association between two nodes triggers
the MO creation. At first, only SctpAssociation MOs in ENABLED state are seen
on the node.

2.13.28 Spare Parameter Handling; Replace Parameters

New attributes are introduced under RncFunction, Paging, and IurLink


MO classes.

Spare Parameter Handling; Replace Parameters

Table 10 lists the affected attributes.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 143


Basic Features

Table 10 Attribute Changes for Spare Parameter Handling; Replace


Parameters
Affected Attributes Description
RncFunction::spare[8] This attribute is released and replaced with a new
Paging::addImsiPagingUraPchEnabled attribute.
IurLink::mnc This attribute is replaced with a new
IurLink::unidirDchSupported attribute.
RabHandling::state128_ This attribute is replaced with a
128Supported new RncFunction::fastDormancyDchPchEnabled
attribute.
AnrIafUtran::anrEnabled This attribute is removed because
it has the same function as
RncFeature=AnrMobility::serviceState.

2.13.29 EMCLI Installation Update

With the improved EMCLI installer, it is possible to update or repair existing


EMCLI installations. Improved handling of user data is introduced in the
installation process.

For Windows PC, it is now possible to repair or modify EMCLI client components,
including Cygwin. The EMCLI tool now provides notification if Cygwin update
is required. Thanks to the improvement, the EMCLI installation is more reliable
and success rate is bigger. The tool also guarantees backward compatibility, by
checking legacy Cygwin packages as well.

With the updated EMCLI installer, improved user data handling is possible during
installation. Backup of the existing user data in the Cygwin installation directory
is created automatically to increase the reliability of reinstallations.

2.13.30 EMGUI Schematic View Improvement, More ENM Alignments

This system improvement implements more alignments of EMGUI to ENM


and related changes to improve usability.

The graphical visualization of node configuration is improved by using icons.


Minor usability and terminology improvements are also implemented. GUI is
improved by introducing icons in Equipment Topology, Support Units, and
Unconfigured Units tab. Other small changes in GUI are implemented to match
ENM or improve the readability and usage of the EMGUI tool.

For more information, see Manage EMGUI.

144 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.13.31 Hardware Runtime Supervision for Internal Ethernet Links


The system improvement introduces the hardware runtime supervision on
internal Ethernet links. When a fault is detected, the alarm Hardware Failure
Imminent is raised.

The system improvement is applicable to the following DUs:

— DUW 11

— DUW 31

— DUW 41

2.13.32 WCDMA Node Health Check

The AMOS based health check command is used to check the health state of
an RNC and a DU Radio Node in an easy and fast way.

The hc command is introduced to simplify evaluation of a node health state.

The health check performs a number of diagnostic checks on a single node or


a batch of nodes according to the defined scope. It evaluates the results, stores
them and allows to compare diagnostic data for each node.

The health check can be performed remotely and does not require highly
experienced personnel to be engaged.

For more information, refer to WCDMA Node Health Check Guide.

2.13.33 Other Changed Behaviors in RNC (18.Q3)


Following RNC node behavior changes are included in W18.Q3 Release:

— DC SP Overload Detection and Protection Improved

— Improved RNC Node Restart Time

2.13.34 External Interference Detection, DUS Observability

A new counter under NodeBSectorCarrier MO class is introduced.

This system improvement introduces a new counter


NodeBSectorCarrier::pmRxInterfererDetect to improve the observability of
narrowband interference in a cell.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 145


Basic Features

2.13.35 RNC Support for Dual Baseband

This system improvement introduces a dual baseband support in RNC for


different configurations.

The RNC introduces the capability to perform soft handover between cells on
the same frequency when the radio node is configured with multiple baseband
units and the UE has radio links configured in more than one baseband unit. This
changes the definition of soft handover. It is now possible within one Managed
Element while softer handover can be handled only within a baseband unit.

This functionality is always ON and cannot be configured by the operator.

2.13.36 UL Throughput for Resource-Limited Users - PM Counters

With this system improvement, new uplink (EDCH) throughput counters and
Key Performance Indicators are introduced to improve the observability of
user UL throughput on cell basis.

The counters measure EDCH throughput only for users that are resource limited.

2.13.37 Support FTP over TLS (FTPES)

This system improvement introduces a possibility to use of FTPES instead of


SFTP.

Client use for FTPES can be configured in the following MOs:


— BrmBackup MO,

— BrmBackupManager MO,

— BrmBackupScheduler MO,

— CertM MO,

— KeyFileManagement MO,

— LogPushTransfer MO,

— Log MO,

— LogM MO,

— NodeCredential MO,

146 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— SwM MO.

The default control port number for explicit FTP over TLS is 9921 and the data
port is a dynamic by default. The control port and the data port are configurable.

FTPES can be used in cases where SFTP is used. FTPES uses configurable mutual
certificate authentication instead of user name/password authentication.

2.13.38 Dual Baseband


Dual Baseband units are supported in a Baseband Radio Node and configured as
follows:

— Core Baseband: The Baseband unit handling Iub and Mub interfaces for the
node

— Regular Baseband: The other Baseband unit connected to the Core


Baseband

With sufficient WCDMA Cell Carriers capacity license, a Radio Node with dual
Baseband configuration supports up to 24 cells since each Baseband unit
supports up to 12 cells. When Increased Cell Carrier Support is enabled, six
additional cells can be enabled on each Baseband unit. The maximum supported
cell number of the node can be 36. For details about the capacity of Baseband
units and Radio Nodes, refer to RBS Configurations and Licenses and Hardware
Activation Codes in Ericsson Software Model.

For a baseband unit with WCDMA local cells configured, one dedicated
NodeBLocalCellGroup MO must be created to accommodate the
NodeBLocalCell MOs. For example, if the core Baseband and regular Baseband
units are both configured with WCDMA local cells, NodeBLocalCellGroup=1
is created for core Baseband unit, and NodeBLocalCellGroup=2 is created for
regular Baseband unit.

The Baseband unit which the local cell and the local cell group belong to
can be checked by the attributes NodeBLocalCell::hostingDigitalUnit and
NodeBLocalCellGroup::hostingDigitalUnit.

To deploy a Baseband Radio Node with dual Baseband configuration, refer to the
following documents:

— Manage Hardware Equipment for the hardware configurations

— Manage Radio Network for the software configurations

The following alarms can be raised on the node with dual Baseband
configuration:

— Link Failure

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 147


Basic Features

— Core Baseband: The Baseband unit handling Iub and Mub interfaces for
theMO Configuration Not Consistent With Installed Equipment

— Sync Internal to Baseband Cluster Lost

— FRU General Problem

2.13.39 Energy Efficient Baseband Configuration

Baseband 5216 and Baseband 6630 can work with part of the baseband
processing resources to save power.

The use of baseband processing resources depends on the installed Expansion


HWAC licenses and the number of enabled UTRAN cells for the node. When part
of the baseband processing resources is used, the node is in power saving and the
power consumption of one baseband unit is reduced by around 30W.
Capacity Value of Number of Enabled Power Saving Mode
Expansion HWAC UTRAN Cells
licenses
0 or 1 Not greater than 12 In power saving
Greater than 12 Out of power saving
Greater than 1 - Out of power saving

2.13.40 Other Changed Behaviors in RNC (18.Q4)


Following RNC node behavior changes are included in W18.Q4 Release:

— Improved Handling of Gauge Counter pmNoOfRlForNonDriftingUes.

2.13.41 EMGUI Edit MO Attributes


This system improvement allows an EMGUI user to modify MO attribute values.
The user must have read and write permissions defined in the user roles.

For more information, see Manage EMGUI.

2.13.42 EMCLI Installer GUI Enhancements

The EMCLI installer GUI is enhanced to make the installation procedure


simpler, faster, and more reliable.

This system improvement simplifies the EMCLI installation procedure, thus


making it more accessible, easier to use, and faster. The new one-click

148 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

installation mode improves the usability of the installer. With the enhanced GUI,
the user input collection is more logical, and requires less time. The new GUI
has a more consistent look and feel as well. Removing the dependency to the
InstallAnywhere™ software improves the reliability of the installer and lowers
maintenance costs.

2.13.43 Eco Climate Mode


The Eco climate mode optimizes the fan speed control to minimize the overall
power consumption for configurations based on RBS 6601. The fan speed is
automatically adjusted to keep the operating temperature within the optimal
range.

Eco climate mode is supported for RBS 6601, except configurations using DUG.

The feature works in the following configurations:

— Baseband 5216 + Baseband 5216

— Baseband 5212 + Baseband 5212

— Baseband 5216 + Baseband 5212

2.13.44 Local Authentication and Authorization for SL1 and SL2

System Improvement introduces enhancements in authentication and


authorization functions provided by the node without the need to configure
the nodes and network for the Security Level 3.

No visible change is expected after system upgrade. Default setting for User
Authentication and Authorization on SL1 and SL2 is Node password (basic
mode) and it is used on SL1 and SL2 as before.

For more information about the User Authentication and Authorization, refer to
Security for O&M Node Access.

2.13.45 RncModule Restriction

The RncModule MO is restricted, to prevent accidental or unwanted deletion.

The RncModule MO can only be created or removed by changing


SoftwareAllocation (SWA) of a particular board.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 149


Basic Features

2.13.46 Improved Synchronization Reference Supervision

This system improvement enhances Synchronization Reference Supervision


in both NGS and single node configurations. It is possible to supervise
and detect the frequency deviations of active external synchronization
references.

2.13.47 Renewal of Certificates Based on OldCertID

The improvement introduces support for the renewal of certificates based


on the OldCertID. This enables the renewal of certificates using external
PKIs.

2.13.48 Configurable Vertical Beamwidth

Configurable Vertical Beamwidth is introduced for AIR 4455.

With Configurable Vertical Beamwidth (FAK 101 0152), the antenna in AIR 4455
can work in two modes:

— Wide mode: The vertical coverage of the antenna is extended. The antenna
can cover more floors of a tall building.

— Narrow mode (Default): The vertical coverage of the antenna is not


extended. The antenna works as legacy.

Wide mode
Narrow mode
U0001510A

Figure 1 Coverage When an Antenna Works in Wide/Narrow Mode

150 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

To use the wide mode, the following conditions need to be met:

— The HWAC capacity license, CXC 401 2285, is installed.

— The new attribute RetDevice::verticalBeamWidthMode for DU Radio


Nodes is set to WIDE_VBW, or RetSubUnit::verticalBeamWidthMode for
Baseband Radio Nodes is set to WIDE.

Configurable vertical beamwidth introduces the alarm changes shown in Table


11.

Table 11 Alarm Changes


Node Type Alarm Description
DU Radio Node NumberOfConfigurableV New alarm
BWRetsExceedsLicense
dLimit
RetSetVBWFailure New alarm
RetFailure Modified alarm
A new alarm cause is
introduced.
Baseband Radio Node RET Failure Modified alarm
A new alarm cause is
introduced.

2.14 FAJ 121 4944: System Improvements in WRAN W19


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W19 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 12 Node Support for FAJ 121 4944: System Improvements in WRAN
W19 Release
System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio
Improvement Node
Execute MO N/A N/A X
Actions
ECT Support for N/A N/A X
WRAT and GRAT
RN File
Generation

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 151


Basic Features

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Support FTP over N/A N/A X
TLS (FTPES)
CE Capacity N/A X N/A
Observability
Enhancement
Stand-alone PKI N/A N/A X
without OSS-
RC/ENM in Zero
Touch Integration
RncModule X N/A N/A
Restriction
Other Changed X N/A N/A
Behaviors (19.Q1)
Health Check N/A N/A X
Function for
Multi-Baseband
Configurations
Cabinet Climate N/A N/A X
Status in 19-inch
Baseband and
Outdoor Products
Local N/A X X
Authentication
and Authorization
for non-RNC
Nodes
EMGUI Support N/A N/A X
MO Delete
Signed SW - N/A N/A X
Offline Signature
Verification
SCTP and BFD N/A N/A X
PM Counters
Enhancements
Enhanced Fault N/A N/A X
Handling for
Radio Power Drop
RNC Support of X X N/A
Soft Handover
between Cells on
Different DUWs

152 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Alert Customer X N/A N/A
that EUL Channel
is Unavailable
CPRI Fault N/A X N/A
Management,
Broken Link
Handling
Site Info, N/A N/A X
Information in
Radio HW Log
EMGUI HW N/A N/A X
Administrative
State
Visualization
Multi CPRI Link N/A X X
Robustness
Improvements to X X X
the Element
Management
Applications
Improvement of N/A X X
Software Error
Alarm
Single RAT N/A N/A X
Restart for
Baseband
Software Faults
t315 Default X N/A N/A
Value Change
Enhanced Power N/A X X
Blossoming
Hardware Fault N/A N/A X
Alarm
Improvements
IRAT X N/A N/A
Recommended
Values Update
Trusted NTP X X N/A
Server for Time of
Day
Improved EUL N/A N/A X
Cell Throughput
Observability for

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 153


Basic Features

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Resource Limited
Users
Improved EUL N/A X N/A
Throughput
Observability on
DU Radio Node
Other Changed X N/A N/A
Behaviors in RNC
(19.Q2)
Licence Key N/A N/A X
Change for HWAC
for Output Power
Improved Output N/A X X
Power HWAC
Implementation
PM Counter for N/A N/A X
Received Power
Failure Alarm Bit
at Radio Unit
Power Drop
EMGUI Create N/A N/A X
MO
EMGUI Alarm N/A N/A X
Presentation
Improved X N/A N/A
Handling of
Counters for
Normal Release of
the NAS Signaling
Phase
Traceability in 6k N/A X X
Enclosures
Removal of N/A N/A X
Restore Through
Emergency
Access
Improved Elliptic N/A N/A X
Curve Ciphers
Fronthaul: N/A N/A X
Support for
Passive Optical
Protection Module

154 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Brute-Force N/A N/A X
Protection on
LMT Ports
New Feature X X X
Recommendation
s
Increase System X N/A N/A
Limits for Cells
and Cell Relations
for Evo Controller
8200/RNC
CPRI N/A X X
Distributions
Using MINI-LINK:
Cascaded Support
for 9.8 Gbps
Improved EUL N/A N/A X
Cell Throughput
Observability for
Resource Limited
Users
Improved HSDPA N/A X X
User Throughput
Observability
Temperature N/A N/A X
Counter for
Outdoor Radio
Units
IDLe N/A N/A X
Observability for
DiPort
Supervision for N/A N/A X
CPRI Link Delay
Change
Ending Support of N/A N/A X
Legacy License
Keys for Output
Power
External N/A X N/A
Interference
Detection
EMGUI Multi- N/A N/A X
Language
Support

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 155


Basic Features

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
EMGUI Health N/A N/A X
Check Adaptation
Trusted NTP N/A N/A X
Server for Time of
Day for Baseband
Radio Node
EMGUI Online N/A N/A X
OPI
Local X N/A N/A
Authentication
and Authorization
for RNC Linux
Improved N/A X X
Observation of
Maximum
Available
Common Power
Pool for WCDMA
Cells
CPRI Diagnostics N/A N/A X
Health Checks
Enhancement
Increase System X N/A N/A
Limits for Cells
and Cell Relations
for Evo Controller
8300/RNC
Introduction of N/A N/A X
New Climate
Control Mode
TX Power Lock N/A X X
Improvements
Configurable N/A N/A X
Restore Button
through
Emergency
Access
RNC OPI X N/A N/A
Enhancement on
UtranCell_Service
Unavailable
Restart and Clock N/A N/A X
State Propagation
Improvements

156 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Node-Self X N/A N/A
Healing: Cell
Service Self-
Recovery
Notification
Uplink Layer 1 N/A X X
Receiver
Improvements
Remote Node N/A X N/A
Recovery at Disk
Corruption Failure
Enhanced EMGUI N/A N/A X
Support on Mobile
Devices
Prompting in N/A N/A X
EMGUI
Representation of N/A N/A X
Ports in EMGUI
Enhanced HTTPS N/A N/A X
Web Server Logs
Lithium-Ion N/A X X
Battery Unit
Support in RBS
6000
Health Check- N/A N/A X
Based Site
Acceptance
New Alarm for N/A N/A X
Power Loss and
Power Failure
Improved X N/A N/A
Selection of
EUL/HS Serving
Cell

2.14.1 Execute MO Actions

This system improvement introduces the executions of MO actions in


EMGUI.

The user must have authorization to run the specific action. For more
information, see Manage EMGUI.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 157


Basic Features

2.14.2 ECT Support for WRAT and GRAT RN File Generation

Support for WCDMA Radio Access configuration type files.

The ECT (Equipment Configuration Tool) is a tool that allows the operator
to verify netconf files for a Baseband Radio Node and generate site-specific
netconf files from a template file. This simplifies the manual work required by the
operator to produce the configuration files.

2.14.3 Support FTP over TLS (FTPES)

This system improvement introduces a possibility to use of FTPES instead of


SFTP.

Client use for FTPES can be configured in the following MOs:


— BrmBackup MO

— BrmBackupManager MO

— BrmBackupScheduler MO

— CertM MO

— KeyFileManagement MO

— LogPushTransfer MO

— Log MO

— LogM MO

— NodeCredential MO

— SwM MO

The default control port number for explicit FTP over TLS is 9921 and the data
port is a dynamic by default. The control port and the data port are configurable.

FTPES can be used in cases where SFTP is used. FTPES uses configurable mutual
certificate authentication instead of user name/password authentication.

2.14.4 CE Capacity Observability Enhancement


The first element of the following counters now shows the static CE capacity,
which equals to the minimum of the SW CE license, HW CE capacity or HWAC CE
license.

158 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— DownlinkBasebandPool::pmCapacityDlCe

— UplinkBasebandPool::pmCapacityUlCe

— UplinkBasebandPool::pmCapacityUlCeExt

— NodeBFunction::pmCapacityNodeBDlCe

— NodeBFunction::pmCapacityNodeBUlCe

— NodeBFunction::pmCapacityNodeBUlCeExt

Note: If the installed SW CE license and HWAC CE license are higher than the
HW CE capacity, the first element of these counters can show a lower
value than before upgrade.

The following attributes are added to show the available DL/UL CE capacity,
including the static CEs and dynamic CEs:

— DownlinkBasebandPool::avaiableTotalCeDl

— UplinkBasebandPool::avaiableTotalCeUl

For more information, refer to Performance Management for Uplink Channel


Element Capacity.

2.14.5 Stand-alone PKI without OSS-RC/ENM in Zero Touch Integration

This system improvement introduces the possibility to enroll operator IPsec


certificates from standalone PKI system.

2.14.6 RncModule Restriction

The RncModule MO is restricted, to prevent accidental or unwanted deletion.

The RncModule MO can only be created or removed by changing


SoftwareAllocation (SWA) of a particular board.

2.14.7 Other Changed Behaviors in RNC (19.Q1)


Following RNC node behavior changes are included in W19.Q1 Release:

— PS RAB Release Caused by User-inactivity.

— Better Observability of Session Upswitch from SP0 to CELL_DCH.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 159


Basic Features

— Handling of Unrecognized LAC/RAC in Paging Message.

2.14.8 Health Check Function for Multi-Baseband Configurations

This improvement introduces health check for Baseband Radio Nodes with
multi-Baseband configurations.

For more information about health check, refer to Manage Node Health Check.

For detailed information about multi-Baseband configurations, refer to Manage


Hardware Equipment.

2.14.9 Cabinet Climate Status in 19-inch Baseband and Outdoor Products

This improvement provides observability of climate activities, performance


and fan speed in configurations without SCU.

This improvement provides temperature and fan speed counters for outdoor
products and 19-inch Baseband units. The unit thermal conditions are measured
and presented on the FieldReplaceableUnit MO, and the fan speed counters
are on the SupportUnit MO.

2.14.10 Local Authentication and Authorization for non-RNC Nodes

System Improvement introduces enhancements in authentication and


authorization functions provided by the node without the need to configure
the nodes and network for the Security Level 3.

No visible change is expected after system upgrade. Default setting for User
Authentication and Authorization on SL1 and SL2 is Node password (basic
mode) and it is used on SL1 and SL2 as before.

For more information about the User Authentication and Authorization, refer to
Security for O&M Node Access.

2.14.11 EMGUI Support MO Delete

This system improvement allows an EMGUI user to delete an MO.

To delete an MO, the user must have read and write permissions defined in the
user roles.

160 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.14.12 Signed SW - Offline Signature Verification

New instruction on how to verify that the software package originated from
Ericsson and that it has not been tampered with or altered in transit.

This system improvement provides an operator with option to verify software


package signature and to prevent malware attacks, by not installing the software
for which authenticity and integrity is not validated successfully.

For more information about this new optional SW signature verification


procedure, refer to Install Upgrade Package.

2.14.13 Enhanced DCH EUL Load Balancing


The enhanced measurement of cell congestion is more accurate.

This can be observed by a lower value of counter


pmTotalTimeEulDchBalancing.

2.14.14 SCTP and BFD PM Counters Enhancements

This enhancement supports additional statistical counters in Stream Control


Transmission Protocol (SCTP) and Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
(BFD) to supervise the quality of the connectivity.

This enhancement provides greater visibility in transport path quality by


supporting SCTP Round Trip Time (RTT) delay measurement and tracking of
BFD session down characteristics.

The new PM counters can enhance the operator possibility to detect quality
issues on different SCTP paths. The operator gets better observability support for
BFD based monitoring of L3 paths.

2.14.15 RNC Support of Soft Handover between Cells on Different DUWs

This system improvement allows cells that use the same UTRA Absolute
Radio Frequency Number (UARFCN) to be allocated to different Baseband
Pools (BBPs).

With this System Improvement, cells with the same UTRA Absolute Radio
Frequency Number (UARFCN), that is, cells belonging to the same carrier, can
be allocated to different Baseband Pools (BBPs).

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 161


Basic Features

2.14.16 Alert Customer that EUL Channel is Unavailable

An alarm is introduced to inform about an RNC misconfiguration.

This System Improvement introduces alarm to notify the operator that an RNC is
misconfigured and it has an impact on EUL capability of the Node B. The alarm
appears on Eul MO when IubEdch MO has not been configured for IubLink MO.

2.14.17 CPRI Fault Management, Broken Link Handling

This system improvement improves alarm raising mechanism for broken


links and provides better observability for disabled cells.

The following improvements for broken links are introduced to CPRI fault
management:

— Alarm is issued for the following two cases when a stable connection cannot
be achieved within 500 seconds:

• Real persistent link breaks, which cannot be solved by a software


recovery action

• Short link breaks, which reoccur continuously causing unstable CPRI


connection

— More information is provided in availability log for disabled cells caused by


lost CPRI connection.

The new information shows like Lost connection to auxiliary unit


<link handler>, related cells will be impacted.

The alarm changes are shown in Table 13.

Table 13 Alarm Changes


Alarm MO Additional Text Comment
CableFailure DigitalCable Not in Additional text
operation Not in
operation
replaces Loss Of
Signal.
If the CPRI link is
established but no
stable connection
is achieved in 500
seconds since the
first link down is

162 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Alarm MO Additional Text Comment


detected, then the
CPRI link is
considered broken
and the alarm is
raised. After the
remedy actions
are performed as
instructed in
CableFailure, if
the connection is
stable for 30
seconds, the
alarm is ceased.
For the CPRI links
between two
cascaded DUWs,
the mechanism is
left as in legacy,
which means that
the alarm is raised
after the link is
unavailable for
1.2 seconds.
No signal If the CPRI link,
detected including the link
between two
cascaded DUWs,
is not established
in 3 minutes after
link start, this
alarm is raised.

For more information about the alarm, refer to CableFailure.

2.14.18 Site Info, Information in Radio HW Log

This system improvement enables the recording of configuration


information from a Baseband unit in the radio event log when unit starts or
restarts.

The recording information includes Site ID and radio link configuration


information. If the unit is returned, the provided additional information helps
the field technician to determine the reason why it was returned.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 163


Basic Features

2.14.19 Multi CPRI Link Robustness

Primary CPRI link redundancy in multiple CPRI configurations is provided


by Multi CPRI link robustness improvement.

Multi CPRI link robustness is a system improvement that provides primary CPRI
link redundancy in multiple CPRI configurations. The primary CPRI link is no
longer fixed. In case of primary CPRI link failure, the primary link can switch
to a faultless link carrying application layer Operation and Maintenance (O&M)
signaling.

2.14.20 Improvements to the Element Management Applications


This system improvement improves the startup mechanism of the Element
Management Launcher and the EMCLI Launcher. With this improvement, the
expired certificates no longer block the Launchers.

2.14.21 Improvement of Software Error Alarm


The system improvement introduces the following modifications:
— For DU Radio Node:
— The additional texts for GeneralSwError alarm on the MOs listed below
are removed to align with other MOs.
• AlmDevice

• AlmDeviceSet

• TmaDevice

• TmaDeviceSet

— For Baseband Radio Node:


— The additional texts for SW Error alarm are modified.

— A new alarm Antenna General Problem is introduced to replace the SW


Error alarm when the antenna system rejection faults occur.

For more information about software error alarm, refer to GeneralSwError or SW


Error.

To handle the new alarm, refer to Antenna General Problem.

164 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.14.22 Single RAT Restart for Baseband Software Faults


Single RAT restart is introduced to the automatic recovery procedure for
Baseband software faults. If the RAT restart does not solve the fault, warm
restart of the node is performed as the next step. The procedure applies to single
and multi standard nodes. For the detailed procedure, refer to Manage Faults.

For multi standard nodes, the single RAT restart avoids disturbing the traffic on
coexisting RATs. Therefore, the robustness of the node is improved.

Note: For dual Baseband nodes, when a baseband fault of specific RAT is
detected, the same RAT deployed on either board restarts.

2.14.23 t315 Default Value Change

The default and recommended value of the Rrc::t315 attribute is changed.

The default and recommended value of parameter Rrc::t315 has been changed
from 10 to 0.

When the attribute is set to 0, no attempts to reestablish the PS RAB are made
thus preventing UE from dropping.

2.14.24 Enhanced Power Blossoming


When cells are unlocked, RBS Power Blossoming on page 84 is performed. The
functionality is enhanced with the following:

— The power ramp-up for P-CPICH starts from a lower power, therefore the
duration of power blossoming is extended.

— The maximum HS downlink transmission power is limited and ramps up at


the same pace as P-CPICH.

This enhancement further reduces the intra-frequency interference from the cells
in power blossoming to the surrounding cells.

The call drop rate is decreased because of the reduced interference. This can be
observed by the following KPIs:

— Speech_R: Indicates the drop rate of Circuit-Switched Speech

— PacketintHs_R: Indicates the drop rate of RAN-related HS Connection

The number of call re-establishments is also reduced when the Call Re-
establishment related features are activated. This can be observed by the
following counters from UE or network side. In this case, the call drop rate
decrease is not significant.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 165


Basic Features

— pmCallReestAttCsNwInit

— pmCallReestReqCsNwInit

— pmCallReestAttCs

— pmCallReestReqCs

— pmCallReestSuccCs

2.14.25 Hardware Fault Alarm Improvements

HW Partial Fault alarm is introduced.

The following changes are done to the alarms for hardware faults:

— The new alarm HW Partial Fault is raised for minor hardware faults,
which do not require immediate actions. The additional text of this alarm
points out the root cause.

— For the alarm HW Fault, which requires immediate actions, most of the
additional text is removed. Only the following is kept:

• HW Test Fault

• LTU Fault

• Mixed Mode with other ME

For more information about the alarm, refer to HW Partial Fault and HW Fault.

2.14.26 Trusted NTP Server for Time of Day

Authentication and integrity protection are introduced to avoid malicious


changes of Time of Day in the NTP servers.

The authentication and integrity protection are based on symmetric pre-


shared keys. The keys must be installed on both nodes and standalone NTP
servers before the authentication is enabled. For details about the key and
authentication, refer to Security for O&M Node Access and Managed Element.

Note: The node can be configured with authenticated and unauthenticated


NTP servers simultaneously. Among these NTP servers, the one with
the best quality of time is selected as the time source, and this server
can be unauthenticated. Therefore, configuring authentication for all
NTP servers is recommended to ensure that the time of the node is
synchronized with an authenticated server.

166 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

This improvement is default off. To enable the authentication, perform the


procedure stated in Managed Element.

ENM can be used to enable NTP authentication and manage NTP authentication
keys. The required ENM release is 19.2 or later.

If the authentication is enabled but the key is missing or not properly installed,
the alarm NTP Authentication Key Fault is raised. If authentication fails for the
NTP server, and no other peer candidate is configured, NTP System Time Sync
Fault is raised.

This improvement applies to DU Radio Nodes and EvoC 8200/RNC. The


interworking NTP servers must support NTP authentication.

2.14.27 IRAT Recommended Values Update

Recommended values for


UtranCell::absPrioCellRes.threshServingLow and
EutranFreqRelation::threshLow are changed.

The recommended values of the following RNC parameters have been updated:

— UtranCell::absPrioCellRes.threshServingLow from 16 to 3

— EutranFreqRelation::threshLow from 6 to 8

Default values remain unchanged.

2.14.28 Other Changed Behaviors in RNC (19.Q2)


Following RNC node behavior changes are included in W19.Q2 Release:

— Better Usage of FDPCH Code for EUL-FACH

— DC and MC Load Reduction for EvoC 8300

— Changes behaviors related to Support of MOCN and Dedicated Cells in One


RNC.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 167


Basic Features

2.14.29 Licence Key Change for HWAC for Output Power

A new license key is provided for Output Power HWAC. LKF needs to be
updated to include new keys before upgrading to 19.Q2.

2.14.30 Improved Output Power HWAC Implementation

The output power HWAC implementation is improved on both DU Radio


Node and Baseband Radio Node.

This system improvement introduces the following changes:


— For DU Radio Node:

The new license key CXC 401 2338 is introduced for the following output
power HWACs: shows the two new attributes, which replace the deprecated
attributes on DU Radio Node.
— Output Power 20 W to 40 W

— Output Power 40 W to 60 W

— Output Power 60 W to 80 W

— Output Power 80 W to 100 W

— Output Power 100 W to 120 W

— Output Power 120 W to 140 W

— Output Power 140 W to 160 W

— Output Power 160 W to 180 W

— Output Power 180 W to 200 W

— Output Power 200 W to 220 W

— Output Power 220 W to 240 W

Before upgrading to W19.Q4, the LKF must be regenerated in ELIS and


installed to the node. The new LKF includes the old keys and the new key.
Only the new key is valid from W19.Q4.

Note: If the new key is not included in the LKF, only 20W can be used for
each radio unit on the node.

— For Baseband Radio Node:

168 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

• The new FAK 101 0160 with the existing CXC 401 2338 is introduced for
output power above 320 W.

• The PM counter pmLicOutputPowerHwac shows the two new attributes,


which is introduced to the new CapacityUsage MO.

Table 14

Table 14 Attribute Change


New Attribute Deprecated Attribute
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityO NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
utputPower20WStep um40WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um60WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um80WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um100WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um120WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um140WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um160WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um180WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um200WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um220WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseCapacityN
um240WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateOutp NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum4
utPower20WStep 0WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum6
0WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum8
0WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum1
00WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum1
20WPowerAmplifiers

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 169


Basic Features

New Attribute Deprecated Attribute


NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum1
40WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum1
60WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum1
80WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum2
00WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum2
20WPowerAmplifiers
NodeBFunction::licenseStateNum2
40WPowerAmplifiers

Table 15 shows the two new alarms, which replaces the deprecated alarms on
DU Radio Node and Baseband.

Table 15 Alarm Change


Node New Alarm Fault MO Deprecated Alarm
DU Radio Node MOConfiguration TpaDevice — NumberOf40
ExceedsResource WPowerAmpl
sEnabledByTheKe ifiersExceedsL
y icensedLimit

— NumberOf60
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf80
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf100
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf120
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf140
WPowerAmpl

170 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Node New Alarm Fault MO Deprecated Alarm


ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf160
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf180
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf200
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf220
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit

— NumberOf240
WPowerAmpl
ifiersExceedsL
icensedLimit
Baseband Radio MO Configuration NodeBSectorCar — Resource
Node Exceeds rier Allocation
Resources Failure with
Enabled by The additional
Key text No RF
power
Hardware
Activation
Code
available.

— Resource
Allocation
Failure
Service
Degraded
with
additional
text
Insufficient
RF power
Hardware

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 171


Basic Features

Node New Alarm Fault MO Deprecated Alarm


Activation
Codes.

2.14.31 PM Counter for Received Power Failure Alarm Bit at Radio Unit Power Drop

The FieldReplacableUnit.pmPowerFailure counter monitors the power


drops reported by radio units.

FieldReplacableUnit.pmPowerFailure measures the number of Power Failure


Alarm events from the CPRI line within the measurement period of 15 minutes.

Benefits of the improvement:

— Improved observability for the power supply of the radio unit

— Reduced risk of No Fault Found (NFF) in radio HW

2.14.32 EMGUI Create MO

EMGUI Create MO

The improvement introduces the possibility of creating MOs in the EMGUI.

2.14.33 EMGUI Alarm Presentation

This improvement introduces alarm correlation in EMGUI.

Node troubleshooting efficiency is improved in EMGUI by presentation of


correlated alarms.

2.14.34 Improved Handling of Counters for Normal Release of the NAS Signaling
Phase

The improvement allows stepping of counters for Normal Release of the


NAS for anyvalue of RRC establishment cause received from the UE.

At RAB establishment, counters for Normal Release of the NAS signaling phase
are steppedfor any value of RRC establishment cause received from the UE.
Higher values can beobserved.

172 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.14.35 Traceability in 6k Enclosures

The Traceability in 6k Enclosures improves the handling of cabinet product


data inthe case of Baseband and SCU reuse in new or old configurations.

For Baseband, a more reliable and easier handling of cabinet product data
mismatch condition is introduced. By the improved validation of product data
there is a smaller risk of entering invalid cabinet product information data.

For both DU and Baseband in the case of RBS 6601, the node automatically
identifies the RBS cabinet type, and automatically corrects any cabinet product
data mismatch. No manual intervention is needed and no alarm is raised.

2.14.36 Removal of Restore Through Emergency Access


This system improvement enhances the security of the Emergency Access GUI
by removing the possibility of restoring a board to its initial state through the
Emergency Access GUI, if the board is equipped with a physical Board Restore
Button.

2.14.37 Improved Elliptic Curve Ciphers


The Improved Elliptic Curve Ciphers system improvement adds new elliptic curve
handling related to SSH. Baseband radio node can also use ECDSA-based public
or private keys when the node serves as an SSH Server for different services. With
this improvement, the keys can be shorter, and less computing power, memory,
and battery is needed.

2.14.38 Fronthaul: Support for Passive Optical Protection Module


This system improvement introduces the use of Fronthaul 6080 without Photonic
Management Unit since control and monitoring of OPM-1-S-1 is managed
directly by Baseband unit. The state and alarm monitoring performed by
the Optical Protection Module improves the observability and troubleshooting
functionality of the CPRI links. As a result it is easier to determine if the CPRI link
issue is related to the RBS Equipment or to the Fronthaul 6080.

2.14.39 Brute-Force Protection on LMT Ports

This system improvement introduces a brute-force protection mechanism


on the LMT port and every logical port that uses SSH. This prevents any
users without valid login credentials to gain access to the node through a

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 173


Basic Features

maintenance account. The protection mechanism also introduces both user


login delay and user account lockout.

2.14.40 New Feature Recommendations

Several feature recommendations have been updated in line with the


Ericsson Zero Touch concept.

Feature recommendations have been divided into four categories:

— ACTIVATED

The feature is part of a general recommended configuration profile for a


robust and high performing network.

— DEACTIVATED

The feature is not recommended for general use. For example, it may require
UE capabilities not commonly available, or the functionality may be covered
in a better way by another feature.

— No recommendation

Sufficient live network feedback has not been yet received for this feature.
A general recommendation requires extensive feedback from several live
networks.

— Scenario dependent

For specific network configurations or activities, such as shared RAN or


advanced monitoring.

To achieve maximum stability and optimal performance, it is also advised to use


recommended parameters setting.

See Parameter and Feature Recommendations to check the feature


recommendations.

2.14.41 Enhanced Fault Handling for Radio Power Drop


The system improvement introduces the alarm Power Disturbance on MO
ExternalPower. When the radio unit detects insufficient power supply, it
performs stepwise RF output power back-off. The new alarm, as replacement
of the existing alarm Power Loss, is raised when the hard-coded power back-off
limit is reached.

It gives the following benefits:

174 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Early detection of insufficient input power to radio units before the traffic is
lost.

— Reduced number of radio replacements by pinpointing the problem to


external power devices rather than radio units.

— Accurate fault location with the additional text.

The legacy alarm Power Loss is modified to only indicate the complete loss of
radio power supply.

For details about the alarms, refer to Power Disturbance and Power Loss.

2.14.42 EMGUI HW Administrative State Visualization

This improvement shows the value of administrativeState attribute for


the Equipment branch in EMGUI.

This improvement visualizes the value of administrativeState attribute for


EquipmentView Page in EMGUI. MO is indicated as locked with a lock pad icon
if the administrativeState attribute is LOCKED or SHUTTINGDOWN. Related
MOs and the attribute are marked with the same icon.

2.14.43 Increase System Limits for Cells and Cell Relations for Evo Controller
8200/RNC

The improvement increases the system limit for the number of cells and the
number of cell relations in Evo Controller 8200/RNC.

The following system limits apply:

— the number of cells is increased from 5 301 to 6 120

— the number of cell relations is increased from 220 000 to 260 000

This system improvement is not supported by ENM 19.2. ENM support is planned
for future releases.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 175


Basic Features

2.14.44 CPRI Distributions Using MINI-LINK: Cascaded Support for 9.8 Gbps

Fronthaul 6392 can be used with CPRI line rate option 7 with 9.8 Gbps on
cascaded links.

Fronthaul 6392 supports line rate option 7 with 9.8 Gbps over the air for DU
connected configurations, and for cascaded CPRI links.

9.8 Gbps CPRI link is possible for the initial line rate.

2.14.45 Improved EUL Cell Throughput Observability for Resource Limited Users
New PM counters and KPIs are introduced to measure EUL cell throughput for
resource limited users.

For more information, refer to Radio Network KPI.

2.14.46 Improved EUL Throughput Observability on DU Radio Node

The observability of EUL throughput is improved for resource limited users


and application limited users

New PM counters and KPIs are introduced to measure the EUL throughput for
resource limited users and application limited users on DU Radio Node. An EUL
user is regarded as a resource limited user when the utilization of UL resources is
higher than a predefined threshold (80%) during an observation period (100 ms).
Otherwise, it is considered as an application limited user.

For more information, refer to Radio Network KPI.

2.14.47 Improved HSDPA User Throughput Observability

The observability of the HSDPA user throughput is improved.

The KPI PINTHS_I_DLTP_User_Rlim is defined to measure the HSDPA


user throughput when resource limited, which is similar to the full
buffer user throughput measurement (defined in 3GPP TS32.450 for
LTE, which is also valid for WCDMA). However, this KPI has one
major deviation, that is, the blocked transmissions followed by a user-
multiplexed TTI (for example, Tb in the figure below) are not counted on
HsDschResources::pmSumBlockedTransmissionsRlim. This major deviation
results in a higher observed PINTHS_I_DLTP_User_Rlim than the full buffer user
throughput, which is widely used. This system improvement changes this major
deviation to align with full buffer user throughput measurement.

176 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Two changes are introduced:

1. In the user multiplexed TTI, only the resource limited users’ behaviors are
counted on the following counters; while previously all the users’ behaviors
are counted if one or more users are resource limited.
— HsDschResources::pmSumTransmissionsUsersRlim

— HsDschResources::pmSumAckedBitsUsersRlim

— HsDschResources::pmSamplesSumAckedBitsUsersRlim

The above counters are also considered when calculating the KPI
PINTHS_I_DLTP_User_Rlim, but they have minor impact on the KPI value.
2. In MAC-hs/MAC-ehs layer, if HARQ failure happens, all the related
transmissions are counted on the following counters; while previously all
these HARQ related transmissions are not counted.
— HsDschResources::pmSumTransmissions

— HsDschResources::pmSumTransmissionsRlim

— HsDschResources::pmSumTransmissionsUsersRlim

The counter HsDschResources::pmSumTransmissionsRlim is considered


when calculating the KPI PacketintHs_I_DlTp, it has an impact on the KPI
value.

With this improvement, the value of


HsDschResources::pmSumBlockedTransmissionsRlim is increased and the
decrease of the two KPIs PINTHS_I_DLTP_User_Rlim and PacketintHs_I_DlTp
are inevitable. The improved KPIs show the accurate full buffer user throughput
and cell throughput. This system improvement only impacts the observability and
has no impact on the actual end user experience

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 177


Basic Features

Blocked transmission
Failed transmission
Successful transmission, buffer not empty
Successful transmission, buffer empty
Other user's transmission

Resource Limited TTIs

Tb Tm Time (2ms)
Data arrives at User's PQ buffer PQ buffer emptied after this scheduling

Tb: Blocked transmission TTI


Tm: User-multiplexed TTI U0001528A

For more information, refer to Radio Network KPI.

2.14.48 Temperature Counter for Outdoor Radio Units

This system improvement adds observability of unit temperature level


for outdoor radio units and extends environmental logs with data for
temperature level and fan tray speed.

This system improvement introduces the support of


FieldReplaceableUnit::pmUnitTemperatureLevel PM counter for outdoor
radio units.

The environmental log is extended with static and dynamic


data from the FieldReplaceableUnit::pmUnitTemperatureLevel and
SupportUnit::pmFanSpeed PM counters. The environmental log can be found
on the node disc.

2.14.49 IDLe Observability for DiPort

This system improvement provides IDLe physical layer observability for


baseband units in multibaseband configurations.

With this system improvement, the Xcede module, which is the connector for
IDLe port, is represented by the SfpModule MO.

178 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Note: When SfpModule MO represents Xcede module,


SfpModule::availabilityStatus is always ENABLED and
SfpModule::operationalState has no status value. In addition, the
administrative state of the Xcede module does not affect the availability
status of DiPort.

When Xcede modules are connected to optical cables, IDLe physical layer
characteristics can be observed by the following counters on the MO
SfpChannel:

— pmChannelRxPower

— pmChannelTxBias

— pmChannelTxPower

The following read-only attributes are introduced on DiPort:

— sfpModuleRef: refers to the SfpModule MO, which represents the Xcede


module.

— channelRef: refers to the SfpChannel MO, which represents the Xcede


channel.

Note: All channels of the Xcede module are added as channelRef


regardless of the activation state of the channel.

ENM support for this improvement is from 19.3 version.

2.14.50 Supervision for CPRI Link Delay Change


When a CPRI link delay change is more than ±1 basic frame, the new counter
NodeBSectorCarrier::pmCpriExtDelayChange is pegged. The temporary
alarm Resource Configuration Failure is no longer raised for the delay change.

Alarm Name Managed Object Additional Text


Resource NodeBLocalCell Big path delay change
Configuration triggered Cell restart!
Failure

When the CPRI link delay change is more than ±1 basic frame, the cell restarts
to reconfigure the new CPRI link delay. In Availability Log, the additional
information Cell Reset to Reconfigure Link Delay is introduced to the
OutOfService event when cell restarts in this case.

2.14.51 Ending Support of Legacy License Keys for Output Power


The enhancement removes the software support of legacy CXC keys for output
power. From software version 19.Q3, only the new CXC key is supported, that is

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 179


Basic Features

mapped with a generic 20W step model. The following output power capacities
are affected by the license key change:

— Output Power 20 W to 40 W

— Output Power 40 W to 60 W

— Output Power 60 W to 80 W

— Output Power 80 W to 100 W

— Output Power 100 W to 120 W

— Output Power 120 W to 140 W

— Output Power 140 W to 160 W

— Output Power 160 W to 180 W

— Output Power 180 W to 200 W

— Output Power 200 W to 220 W

— Output Power 220 W to 240 W

— Output Power 240 W to 260 W

— Output Power 260 W to 280 W

— Output Power 280 W to 300 W

— Output Power 300 W to 320 W

The main benefit of this enhancement is that it makes transition from legacy
license keys to the new license key easier. The enhancement also simplifies the
handling of radio output power licenses.

2.14.52 External Interference Detection


The counter Carrier::pmRxInterfererDetect is introduced to observe
narrowband interference in a cell.

180 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.14.53 EMGUI Multi-Language Support

The enhancement introduces multi-language support in the EMGUI, which


enables the user to switch between available languages during the EMGUI
runtime.

Because of this enhancement, Chinese language support is enabled in the


EMGUI.

For more information, see Manage EMGUI.

2.14.54 EMGUI Health Check Adaptation

This system improvement introduces easy access to CPRI-related health


checks inEMGUI.

With this improvement, CPRI-related health checks can be run from EMGUI.

For more information, see Manage EMGUI.

2.14.55 Trusted NTP Server for Time of Day for Baseband Radio Node

This system improvement introduces reliable time and date information,


provided by using symmetric key authentication for NTP messages. It
enables NTP Time of Day authentication towards an external NTP server
to avoid timestamps being hacked during transport.

2.14.56 EMGUI Online OPI

The improvement enables the handling of active alarms on a node from


EMGUI.

The relevant alarm handling instructions can be opened directly from the EMGUI.
The instructions are available through an external link, which opens in a separate
tab. The instructions are accessed directly from the internal storage of the nodes,
similarly to the embedded MOM information.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 181


Basic Features

2.14.57 Local Authentication and Authorization for RNC Linux

This feature enhances local user authentication and authorization for


security levels 1 and 2 using Local Authentication and Authorization
Database (Local AA Database). User specific Authentication and User
specific access rights in various O&M access modes to perform various
activities on node.

2.14.58 Improved Observation of Maximum Available Common Power Pool for


WCDMA Cells

The attribute HsDschResources::maxAvailMixedModeExtraPower is


introduced to observe the maximum available common power pool for
WCDMA cells.

2.14.59 CPRI Diagnostics Health Checks Enhancement

This system improvement introduces additional CPRI-related health checks.

The improvement introduces the following Health Check Rules to allow


monitoring of CPRI link performance:
— Check BER and power loss for optical links

— Check BER for electrical links

— Check TX and RX power for SFP modules

2.14.60 Increase System Limits for Cells and Cell Relations for EvoC 8300

The improvement increases the system limit for the number of cells and the
number of cell relations in Evo Controller 8300/RNC.

The following system limits apply:

— the number of cells is increased from 5 301 to 7 038

— the number of cell relations is increased from 220 000 to 320 000.

This system improvement is supported from ENM 20.1 release.

182 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.14.61 Introduction of New Climate Control Mode

This system improvement introduces a new climate mode for the RBS 6000
series cabinets.

The new ENHANCED mode allows internal and external fan control based on the
SCU temperature sensor. It is possible to use equipment without hotspot as well,
because the SCU temperature sensor is the main temperature information source.
This system improvement prepares the cabinets for NR deployment.

2.14.62 TX Power Lock Improvements


Before this improvement, TX power lock function (see TX Power Lock Remotely
Settable - Small Cell Specific Procedure mRBS and mRRU on page 108) is only
supported on mRBS and mRRU.

The limitation is now removed and the TX power lock function is supported on all
radio units.

To enable TX power lock function, set the parameter txPowerPersistentLock to


true.

2.14.63 Configurable Restore Button through Emergency Access

The system improvement introduces the


LocalAccessM::emergencyRestore attribute to control the presence of the
Board Restore button on the EA GUI for the board, which has a physical
Board Restore Button.

To show the Board Restore button on the EA GUI, set


LocalAccessM::emergencyRestore to WEBENABLED. To hide the button, set
the attribute to PHYSICALONLY.

Note: — To perform the operation, a maintenance user or a System Security


Administrator role is required.

— For the boards without a physical Board Restore Button, the Board
Restore button always displays on the EA GUI regardless of the
setting of the LocalAccessM::emergencyRestore attribute.

For the detailed procedure, refer to Manage Security.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 183


Basic Features

2.14.64 RNC OPI Enhancement on UtranCell_ServiceUnavailable

The improvement introduces information about the cause for the


UtranCell_ServiceUnavailable alarm and provides in the OPI a solution to
clear the alarm.

The solution introduces Additional Text and Additional Info attributes for one of
the most frequent RNC alarms, UtranCell_ServiceUnavailable. The content of the
attributes describes the reason of the cell service being unavailable.

The OPI for the UtranCell_ServiceUnavailable alarm is updated to include the


solution.

2.14.65 Restart and Clock State Propagation Improvements

This system improvement does not allow the traffic on shared radio
resources to start before the nodes that share the radio resources are phase-
aligned.

The improvement reduces cell traffic degradation caused by phase misalignment


on Baseband Radio Nodes.

2.14.66 Node-Self Healing: Cell Service Self-Recovery Notification

The improvement limits the number of alarm notifications by delaying them


until a self-recovery attempt is made. A successful recovery is indicated by a
FM event. If the self-recovery fails, the delayed notification is sent.

The system improvement introduces the CellServiceAutoRecoverySucceeded FM


Event notifications on cell service self-recovery. Cell service primary alarm
notifications are delayed until self-recovery procedure is completed and fails to
bring the cell back into the service.

The significance of the alarm notification is increased which means that alarms
sent for minor problems are avoided.

Short living alarms from which the node successfully recovers within less than a
10-second period are avoided.

184 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.14.67 Uplink Layer 1 Receiver Improvements

The UL inner loop power control is improved to ensure the stability of


received power when either Interference Suppression (FAJ 121 1714) or
Interference Suppression for EUL 10 ms (FAJ 121 2671) is enabled.

The system improvement brings the following benefits:


— Improved speech quality and the end user experience

— Decreased call drop rate for users at cell edge

— Reduced UL power rushes especially in high loaded cells

The decreased call drop rate can be observed by the following KPIs:
— Speech_R

— PacketintHs_R

For more information, refer to Radio Network KPI.

2.14.68 Remote Node Recovery at Disk Corruption Failure

The system improvement allows the node to be remotely recovered when


disk is corrupted.

Disk corruption can disconnect O&M connection and make the node unavailable.
The system improvement provides a solution consisting of the following two
parts to avoid site visit:

1. Automatic O&M connection restore

2. Remote node recovery

This system improvement does not apply to the following cases:

— Multiple DU configuration

— O&M using IPsec

— O&M connected with ATM

This system improvement applies to DUW 11, DUW 31, DUW 41, and ODS 11,
and requires ENM 19.4 or later version for performing the recovery procedure
remotely. For detailed procedure, refer to Remote Node Recovery.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 185


Basic Features

2.14.69 Enhanced EMGUI Support on Mobile Devices

The improvement enhances EMGUI on mobile devices.

The improvement introduces the following enhancements in the EMGUI on


mobile devices:

— Certificate login.

— GUI optimization and visual enhancements.

— Navigational enhancements.

2.14.70 Prompting in EMGUI

The improvement introduces prompting in EMGUI.

The operator is supported with a prompting function in EMGUI when editing


LDNs by proposals for the next level in the following cases:

— Addressing an MO in the MO Browser.

— Editing MO reference type attributes and action parameters.

2.14.71 Representation of Ports in EMGUI

The improvement introduces graphical representation of ports in EMGUI.

The improvement introduces graphical representation of ports in EMGUI. In the


schematic view the operator can see the units with their configured ports.

2.14.72 Enhanced HTTPS Web Server Logs

This improvement introduces enhanced security logging of web server


access.

The improvement ensures that more detailed information is collected and made
available, for example, to detect attacks, fraud or unauthorized usage.

186 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.14.73 Lithium-Ion Battery Unit Support in RBS 6000

With this improvement, the lithium-ion battery units are supported in RBS
6000 and the detailed status information of battery units can be observed.

The new lithium-ion battery units are applicable to the following RBS 6000:
— RBS 6101

— RBS 6102

— RBS 6120

— RBS 6201

For more information about lithium-ion battery units, refer to Battery Unit
Description.

2.14.74 Health Check-Based Site Acceptance

This improvement facilitates automation of the site verification and


acceptance processes, reducing lead time and acceptance-related costs.

The improvement introduces new category SITE_ACCEPTANCE and the


following new health check rules:
— Check VSWR Status

— Check RET Status

— Check TMA Status

— Check RAE Status

The following health check rules are updated:


— Check Hardware Status

— Check Sector Status

For more information, refer to Manage Node Health Check.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 187


Basic Features

2.14.75 New Alarm for Power Loss and Power Failure

This improvement provides a simplified and improved way of handling


power-related radio faults, using a single Power Disturbance alarm.

The Power Loss and the Power Failure alarms are deprecated. Power-related
faults are now indicated by the Power Disturbance alarm, issued by the
ExternalPower MO. This prevents multiple alarms that is Power Loss, Power
Failure and Power Disturbance from being raised simultaneously by a single
fault, causing alarm storms. A single alarm allows the operator to pinpoint the
cause of the problem more accurately.

2.14.76 Improved Selection of EUL/HS Serving Cell


Improved handling of selecting best cell in active set is introduced with
thefeature. Until now, best cell was chosen when the Soft Handover procedure
had beenexecuted at the RL Removal. Result of that was that the Network and
UE had differentview of the best cell. With the new behavior, what is considered
as the best cell isindependent on the mobility direction. The selection of best cell
is based on event1d-HS measurements report.B

For more information, see Handover.

2.15 FAJ 121 5146: System Improvements in WRAN W20


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W20 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 16 Node Support for FAJ 121 5146: System Improvements in WRAN
W20 Release
System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio
Improvement Node
Additional Text N/A X X
Improvements for
Resource-Based
Alarms
Alignment of RLC X N/A N/A
Parameters

188 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Automated N/A N/A X
Configuration of
AISG Devices
Automatic X X N/A
Enabling of Local
Authentication
and Authorization
Baseband Power N/A N/A X
Savings
Detect Wrongly N/A N/A X
Connected CPRI
Cable Case in
Baseband Radio
Node
Detection of N/A N/A X
Transmitted
Power
Enhanced CPRI N/A N/A X
Diagnostics and
Observability,
Improved AMOS
Commands
Timing
Hardware N/A N/A X
Inventory History
Log
Hardware N/A N/A X
Sensitive Install
for Auto-
Integration
Health Check- N/A N/A X
Based Site
Acceptance
Improvement
HSDPA Capacity N/A N/A X
Increase for
Baseband
Improve COLI X N/A N/A
Command for TCP
Counters on ET
Host on Evo
Controller
8200/RNC

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 189


Basic Features

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
Improved N/A N/A X
Supervision of
Synchronization
References
Improved N/A X N/A
Synchronization
Reference
Supervision
Improvement of N/A N/A X
Additional
Information for
Power
Disturbance
Alarm
Increase System X N/A N/A
Limits of External
Cells and Iub
Links
Introduction of X N/A N/A
Trace Streaming
in Ramdisk Mode
for EvoC 8300
License Key Close X X N/A
To Expiration
Recovery N/A N/A X
Initiation and
Recovery Success
Alerts
Robust Call X N/A N/A
Retention during
O&M
Disturbances
Soft Lock during N/A N/A X
Upgrade for
WCDMA
TMA Uplink Gain N/A N/A X
Handling
Improvement
VSWR Value N/A N/A X
Support in EMGUI
VSWR Antenna N/A N/A X
System Validation

190 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.15.1 1TX/1RX Basic Function Support


New RBBs are added to support 1TX/1RX configurations on 4TX/4RX radio
units.

2.15.2 Additional Text Improvements for Resource-Based Alarms


The benefit of this System Improvement is that it is easier and quicker to find the
correct remedy actions thanks to the additional text alignment in the code, alarm
list, and CPI. The improved additional texts provide better understanding of the
fault.

The following alarms are impacted:


— Inconsistent Configuration

— MO Configuration Exceeds Resources Enabled by the Key

2.15.3 Alignment of RLC Parameters

By alignment of the SRB parameters to ones that are used for EUL/HS,
the signal volume load on FACH1 is reduced during transitions to and from
CELL_FACH state.

This system improvement reduces the signal volume load on FACH1 during
transitions to and from CELL_FACH by aligning the SRB parameters to those
used for EUL/HS. Parameters in CELL_FACH are aligned with those in SP0 (UeRc
Ids 9 / 42 / 80) to avoid a separate RB Reconfiguration on CELL_FACH after
speech release.

The system improvement affects the following:

— Counters:

• UtranCell.pmUpswitchHsFachHsSuccess

• UtranCell.pmUpswitchHsFachHsAttempt

• UtranCell.pmDlTrafficVolumeFachSrbOnly

— KPIs:

• FACH1_Sign_U

• FACH_U

• Pint_R_D

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 191


Basic Features

This system improvement provides counters that allow the operator to monitor
the traffic and get an overview of the network performance. For more
information, see Calculation Spreadsheet for Number of Counters in RNC and
Flowcharts for Counters.

2.15.4 Automated Configuration of AISG Devices

AISG devices can be configured automatically depending on the AISG


device scan results.

With this improvement, the operator does not need to manually input the
hardware specific data for the device configuration.

The improvement brings the following benefits:


— The procedure for integrating AISG devices is simplified.

— The effort and time for site configuration is reduced.

For more information about automated configuration, refer to Manage Hardware


Equipment.

2.15.5 Automatic Enabling of Local Authentication and Authorization

With Local Authentication and Authorization (LAA) Database files installed,


LAA is automatically enabled on RNC and DU Radio nodes.

LAAis automatically enabled on RNC and DU Radio Nodes when LAA


Database files are installed. L AA Database files manage the different levels of
authentication and authorization for different users.

Telnet, FTP, UDP link handler and Debug server are disabled when LAA is
enabled. Password files handled by these protocols are deleted.

2.15.6 Baseband Power Savings


This improvement allows the baseband unit to save power by using only half
of the baseband processing resources. It is applicable for single-standard nodes
only.

The power consumption of a baseband unit is reduced up to 22% without impact


to capacity or performance.

This improvement applies to the following hardware:


— Baseband 5216, Baseband 6630, Baseband 6318

192 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— IDU 5209

For more information, refer to Manage Hardware Equipment.

2.15.7 Detect Wrongly Connected CPRI Cable Case in Baseband Radio Node

This system improvement introduces a detection method to find wrongly


connected CPRI cables between the radio, the Baseband Radio Node and
the XMU.

When the faulty case occurs, an alarm MO Configuration Not Consistent


with Installed Equipment is generated on the RiLink MO. When the alarm is
raised, the RiLink MO is kept enabled for traffic.

The detection method covers the following misconnection error cases:


— In a multiple radio configuration, not all cables from the radios are connected
to the same FRU physically.

— In a single radio configuration, each cable is configured for one FRU in MOM,
but two cables are connected physically to the same hardware.

The improvement updates the MO Configuration Not Consistent with


Installed Equipment alarm.

The alarm also improves legacy behavior by covering the use case where a radio
cable is connected to a wrong data port. The customer is notified by the alarm to
find the wrongly connected cable problem quickly.

The Inconsistent Configuration alarm on RiPort is updated to ensure that


wrongly connected cable problems are not raised on RiPort, but on the RiLink
MO with the alarm MO Configuration Not Consistent with Installed
Equipment. When the alarm is raised, the RiLink MO is kept enabled for traffic.

2.15.8 Detection of Transmitted Power

The system improvement introduces detection of transmitted power,


automatic recovery, and an alarm for failed recovery.

Transmitted power for each downlink carrier branch is continuously checked. If


any downlink carrier branch of a cell has no transmitted power, cell re-setup is
automatically performed to recover the cell. When the recovery fails, Downlink
TX No Power Detected alarm is raised for the affected cell. If the cell is soft-
locked, no Downlink TX No Power Detected alarm is raised for failed recovery,
and existing alarm remains. The soft-locked cell can be triggered by the Traffic
Aware Power Save feature (FAJ 121 4159) or manually soft locking the UTRAN
cell in RNC.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 193


Basic Features

To cease the alarm, follow the instructions in Downlink TX No Power Detected.

The system improvement is applicable to the radios that support VSWR


measurements.

2.15.9 Enhanced CPRI Diagnostics and Observability, Improved AMOS Commands


Timing

This system improvement enhances SFP-related CPRI diagnostics by


providing faster execution time of inv and sdi AMOS commands. The
improvement also enhances CPRI observability by increasing history log
storage.

The improvement offers the following benefits:


— Enhanced SFP-related CPRI diagnostics

— Enhanced CPRI observability

2.15.10 Hardware Inventory History Log

When hardware units are replaced during operation, a record is stored in the
Hardware Inventory History Log.

When hardware replacement is made during operation, the information of the


new hardware unit is recorded in the Hardware Inventory History Log.

With the log, operators can easily track the history of hardware replacement.

2.15.11 Hardware Sensitive Install for Auto-Integration


With the improvement, only the unzipped software applicable for the installed
hardware is downloaded to the node at auto-integration. For more information
about HSI, see Hardware Sensitive Install.

Note: Before software downloading, the installed hardware, Baseband and


ENM is connected through transport network.

194 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.15.12 Health Check-Based Site Acceptance Improvement

With this improvement, all health check rules are customizable on health
check job level.

The following existing health check rules are added to the category
SITE_ACCEPTANCE:
— Check WCDMA Traffic

— Check Node B Local Cell Status

— Check Synchronization Clock

— Check Synchronization Reference

— Check CPRI Link Status

A new category ALL is introduced to include all node supported health check
rules and the category OTHER is removed.

For more information, refer to Manage Node Health Check.

2.15.13 HSDPA Capacity Increase for Baseband

The maximum number of HSDPA users on each HS core is increased from


128 to 160.

When multiple cells are allocated to the same HS core, this system improvement
brings the following benefits for high-loaded cells:
— The HS accessibility is improved because more HSDPA users are supported.

— The blocked HS RAB establishment attempt can be reduced due to the


increased HSDPA core capacity.

Note: The number of blocked HS RAB establishment


attempt can be observed through the two PM
counters, UtranCell::pmNoRabEstBlockNodePsIntHsBest and
UtranCell::pmNoRabEstBlockNodePsStrHsBest

For more information about cell allocation to a HS core, refer to Manage Radio
Network.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 195


Basic Features

2.15.14 Improve COLI Command for TCP Counters on ET Host on Evo Controller
8200/RNC

COLI command for TCP counters on ET host is improved on 8200/RNC.

On Evo Controller 8200/RNC, tcpcnt is added as an alias for already existing


oncdrhost tcp COLI command to ensure backward compatibility in case the
previous name is used in a script. Manual page for tcpcnt replaces the one for
oncdrhost tcp.

2.15.15 Improved Supervision of Synchronization References

This system improvement introduces supervision for phase jump events on


time-capable network synchronization references.

This improvement is applicable to existing features that enable time-capable


synchronization. It introduces supervision for phase jump events on time-capable
network synchronization references. Such events are recorded through the new
phaseJump PM counter.

Observability for baseband unit is improved by giving additional information


about the time-capable synchronization reference behavior. Troubleshooting of
synchronization issues, like interference or traffic disturbances, is improved. It is
achieved by making it easier to pinpoint which baseband unit can be the root
cause of the problem.

2.15.16 Improved Synchronization Reference Supervision

This system improvement introduces enhanced mechanism for


differentiation of synchronization reference fault types. Handling of
synchronization reference faults has less impact on network traffic ability.

The probability of raising a synchronization alarm, for example System Clock


Quality Degradation alarm, is lower than on software versions before this
improvement.

196 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.15.17 Improvement of Additional Information for Power Disturbance Alarm

This system improvement adds detail to the Power Disturbance alarm,


and helps speed up on-site work.

The Additional Information field of the Power Disturbance alarm is redefined to


remove a step from unit identification on site, and speed up the alarm resolution
process. For more information, refer to Power Disturbance.

2.15.18 Improved Hardware Fault Management for Radio Units

Automatic recovery is introduced when the connection with the antenna


near units is lost.

When the connection with antenna near units is lost, automatic recovery
is triggered before generating an alarm. If the recovery fails, the alarm No
Connection is raised on the AntennaNearUnit MO.

The system improvement can reduce the number of alarms if the fault can be
automatic recovered.

2.15.19 Increase System Limits of External Cells and Iub Links

The system improvement increases the system limits for the number of
external UTRAN cells, external GSM cells and Iub links in EvoC 8300 and
Evo Controller 8200/RNC.

This system improvement provides the following benefits:

— Ability to merge older RNC 3820 nodes saturated with ExternalUtranCell


and ExternalGsmCell into smaller number of Evo RNC nodes.

— Ability to handle the configurations with three UTRAN cells for each
IubLink.

— Wider geographical area coverage with one node.

— Allows the EvoC RNC Geo-Redundancy (FAJ 121 5182) feature to handle
larger RNC configurations.

The following system limits apply:

— The number of external UTRAN cells is increased from 5,301 to 10,602.

— The number of GSM external cells is increased from 7,680 to 15,360.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 197


Basic Features

— The number of Iub links is increased from 1,767 to 2,346.

2.15.20 Introduction of Trace Streaming in Ramdisk Mode for EvoC 8300

This system improvement introduces trace streaming in ramdisk mode for


EvoC 8300.

Trace streaming in ramdisk mode is used to store traces from early startup of
the node as it does not require IP stack. This mode of trace streaming configures
more number of sub-buffers than trace and error log to accommodate more
number of traces. This feature uses 50MB of ramdisk memory at any point in time
as a circular buffer.

Snapshots recorded in ramdisk mode are in CTF format. To view the traces, the
user needs to copy the archived snapshots to the host machine and use babel
trace viewer to read the traces.

2.15.21 License Key Close To Expiration

Detectionof any of time limited licenses are going to expire in near future is
provided.

Alarm License Key Close To Expiration with severity warning is raised when
time limited licenses are near to expiry days. The expiry days are number of
days between the current-date to stop-date of time-limited license. Here value
for expiry days is 14.Alarm is going to cease when all licenses are expired or
extended for more than expirydays.

2.15.22 Recovery Initiation and Recovery Success Alerts

This improvement introduces two alerts to notify the operator that service
is unavailable (cell disabled) when automatic system recovery is initiated,
and the service is available (cell enabled) again when the automatic system
recovery is finished successfully.

The automatic system recovery is initiated when any of the following faults
occur:
— Baseband unit hardware fault

— CPRI link related fault

— Radio unit related fault

The following two alerts are introduced:

198 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Cell Service Unavailable Auto Recovery Initiated Alert: Indicates the


automatic system recovery is initiated and service is unavailable during the
system recovery.

— Cell Service Available Auto Recovery Successful Alert: Indicates the


automatic system recovery is finished successfully and service is available
again.

These two alerts do not require manual intervention.

2.15.23 Robust Call Retention during O&M Disturbances

This improvement enables Circuit Switch (CS) and Packet Switch (PS)
retainability during O&M unplanned disturbances such as transmission
issues, power outages, RBS restarts.

In case unplanned disturbance occurs, if there is any working radio link left in the
active set, the RNC, instead of releasing the call, removes faulty radio link and
updates the active set accordingly. In case of HS connections, RNC can change
the HS serving cell if there is appropriate candidate in the AS, located in the other
RBS.

If all radio links in the active set are considered to be down, RNC postpones
releasing of the connection and waits for call reestablishment request from the
UE. The following Call Re-establishment features are assumed to be enabled,
otherwise, the connection is dropped:
— Call Re-establishment (FAJ 121 1374)

— Call Re-establishment for PS (FAJ 121 5151)

— Call Re-establishment over Iur (FAJ 121 3273)

2.15.24 Soft Lock during Upgrade for WCDMA

The system improvement introduces soft upgrade for Baseband Radio


Nodes.

With the soft upgrade, traffic can be redirected to overlapping cells served in
adjacent nodes. This avoids service interruptions caused by upgrade restart.

Note: Without overlapping coverage, service interruption cannot be avoided


even if the soft upgrade is selected.

In the activation phase of the software upgrade procedure, operators can choose
HARD or SOFT upgrade mode. The soft upgrade takes longer time to complete
than the hard upgrade.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 199


Basic Features

For detailed operation procedures, refer to Manage Software.

2.15.25 TMA Uplink Gain Handling Improvement

With the system improvement, the uplink gain from TMA in the configured
sector is updated dynamically.

The system improvement brings the following benefits:


— Shorten node startup time up to 14 seconds

— Improve the measurement of RSSI and power spectrum

2.15.26 VSWR Antenna System Validation

This improvement introduces a new MO class to perform VSWR check at


installation, extending the Antenna Return Loss Frequency Sweep.

The improvement provides early detection and fast restoration of installation


problems in antenna systems. A basic test validates antenna system
malfunctions by measuring return loss. This solution provides the following main
benefits:
— Simplified evaluation of test results

— Improved VSWR measurement accuracy

— Support in validation of the raised VSWR supervision alarms

2.15.27 VSWR Value Support in EMGUI

VSWR Value Support in Equipment in EMGUI.

This improvement introduces the support for showing VSWR values for RF
Branches in the EMGUI.

The observability of VSWR values help troubleshooting of radio-antenna link


failures. Observability also helps in the validation of antenna connection quality
during roll out process.

Return loss values from FreqBandData MO class are not listed for multi-
baseband radios.

200 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

2.16 FAJ 121 5273: System Improvements in WRAN W21


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W21 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 17 Node Support for FAJ 121 5273: System Improvements in WRAN
W21 Release
System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio
Improvement Node
Improved N/A N/A X
Hardware Fault
Management for
Radio Units
Node Group N/A N/A X
Synchronization:
Alarm Handling in
Unsupported
Configurations
Automatic X N/A N/A
Truncation of Iur
Neighbor List
Improved MC X N/A N/A
Load Distribution
in EvoC 8300
Configurable N/A N/A X
Alarm Sync
Inconsistent
Configuration
Configurable X N/A N/A
Observability for
Long Alignment
Process between
CC or DC Devices
and C1 Board
WCDMA N/A N/A X
Baseband Reset
on Baseband
6621/Baseband
6631
HWAC for N/A N/A X
Baseband 6621

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 201


Basic Features

System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio


Improvement Node
and Baseband
6631
PS and CS Traffic X N/A N/A
Separation and
Multihomed SCTP
Association
Configuration

2.16.1 Improved Hardware Fault Management for Radio Units

Automatic recovery is introduced when the connection with the antenna


near units is lost.

When the connection with antenna near units is lost, automatic recovery
is triggered before generating an alarm. If the recovery fails, the alarm No
Connection is raised on the AntennaNearUnit MO.

The system improvement can reduce the number of alarms if the fault can be
automatic recovered.

2.16.2 Node Group Synchronization: Alarm Handling in Unsupported


Configurations

An alarm is introduced when Mixed Mode Radio and Multi-Operator RAN


(MORAN) configurations with CPRI shared equipment use unsupported
synchronization solution.

This system improvement introduces the Sync Inconsistent Configuration


alarm to Baseband Radio Nodes used in Mixed Mode Radio and Multi-Operator
RAN (MORAN) configurations with CPRI shared equipment.

The alarm is raised when Managed Elements in Mixed Mode Radio and MORAN
configurations with CPRI shared equipment use an unsupported synchronization
solution. In this case, Node Group Synchronization is the recommended solution,
assuring tight synchronization Managed Elements.

2.16.3 Automatic Truncation of Iur Neighbor List


This system improvement detects if RNSAP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE or
RNSAP RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE message exceeds SCCP limit, due to
large number of cell relations defined in DRNC. Relations are truncated until

202 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

message size is below limit or RNSAP RADIO LINK SETUP FAILURE or RNSAP
RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE is sent.

For more information, see Handover.

2.16.4 Improved MC Load Distribution in EvoC 8300

The improvement provides to the Module Controller (MC) load distribution


algorithm the use of the real load measurements of each MC instead of
average load taken from processing units assigned to MCs working on the
same processor.

With this improvement, MC load distribution can be optimized on EvoC 8300.

2.16.5 Configurable Alarm Sync Inconsistent Configuration

The system improvement provides the possibility to disable the Sync


Inconsistent Configuration alarm.

Setting the RadioEquipmentClock::syncInconsistentConfigAlarmEnabled


attribute to false can stop the new raise of the Sync Inconsistent
Configuration alarm, and cease the already raised alarm immediately.

2.16.6 Configurable Observability for Long Alignment Process between CC or DC


Devices and C1 Board
This system improvement adds the following FM events to indicate the start and
the end of the long alignment process between the CC or DC devices and the C1
board.

Table 18 Events
FM Event Description
TimDevice_LongAlignmentIndicati See MOM description.
on
TimDevice_LongAlignmentFinished See MOM description.

Information about remaining alignment time is available through the spsync


timealignment COLI command.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 203


Basic Features

2.16.7 WCDMA Baseband Reset on Baseband 6621/Baseband 6631

WCDMA baseband reset behavior on Baseband 6621/Baseband 6631 is


different from other Baseband units.

GSM baseband restart caused by software fault can lead to WCDMA baseband
restart in the following configurations:
— W+G on Baseband 6621

— L+W+G on Baseband 6631

WCDMA traffic is lost temporally at the restart.

On other Baseband units, GSM baseband restart in this case does not impact
WCDMA.

2.16.8 HWAC for Baseband 6621 and Baseband 6631

HWACs with the utility modules Throughput and ABW are introduced for
Baseband 6621 and Baseband 6631.

— For Baseband 6621

• FAK 101 0232: Initial HWAC Baseband 6621 Utility Module - CXC 401
2471

• FAK 101 0233: Initial HWAC Baseband 6621 Utility Module ABW - CXC
401 2472

— For Baseband 6631

• FAK 101 0234: Initial HWAC Baseband 6631 Utility Module - CXC 401
2471

• FAK 101 0235: Initial HWAC Baseband 6631 Utility Module ABW - CXC
401 2472

Note: The initial packages (IPs) enable full capacity for WCDMA in 21.Q3.
Refined enforcement in accordance with commercial agreements is
planned for later release. With the complete enforcement, expansion
packages (EPs) are needed for configurations where capacity provided
by the IP is not enough.

When no initial package is installed on the node, the alarm Resource Allocation
Failure raises.

204 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

Alarm Name MO Additional Text


Resource Allocation NodeBLocalCell Unable to allocate
Failure baseband HW resources
due to insufficient
baseband HWAC for this
RAT.

2.16.9 PS and CS Traffic Separation and Multihomed SCTP Association


Configuration

The improvement enables the increase of the number of SCTP Front Ends
in RNC EvoC 8300 to allow Circuit Switched (CS) and Packet Switched (PS)
control plane traffic separation while keeping all redundancy options.

This improvement introduces the ability to create four SCTP Front Ends on RNC
EvoC 8300, similar to the capability of EvoC 8200/RNC.

With this improvement, the operator can separate signaling at the SCTP Front
End level. For example, a separate SCTP Front End can be configured to handle
the CS or the PS domain signals exclusively.

For more information, see Reconfigure SCTP Front Ends EvoC 8300.

2.17 FAJ 121 5414: System Improvements in WRAN W22


Release
This improvement contains a number of enhancements and improvements
that are part of RAN W22 basic functionality. They increase the efficiency of
particular network elements and the performance of RAN network as such.

Table 19 Node Support for FAJ 121 5414: System Improvements in WRAN
W22 Release
System RNC DU Radio Node Baseband Radio
Improvement Node
Load-Based N/A N/A X
Steered HS
Allocation
ABW and N/A N/A X
Throughput
HWAC
Enhancement for
WCDMA

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 205


Basic Features

2.17.1 Load-Based Steered HS Allocation

The function Load-Based Steered HS Allocation automatically generates


the optimal HS allocation plan. Local cells can be allocated to HSDPA cores
by COLI commands according to the plan.

Load-Based Steered HS Allocation is an enhancement of Steered HS Allocation


on page 142. This function provides an optimal HS allocation plan based on
traffic data monitoring. Operators use COLI commands to check the plan details
and allocate HSDPA cores according to the plan.

This system improvement reduces OPEX and simplifies the operation of Steered
HS Allocation. HS user capacity and HS accessibility are improved in high loaded
networks.

This improvement applies to the following Baseband units:

— Baseband 5212, 5216

— Baseband 6620, 6630

— Baseband 6603, 6318

— Baseband 6502

For more information about the function and configurations, see Manage Radio
Network WCDMA.

2.17.2 ABW and Throughput HWAC Enhancement for WCDMA

This system improvement enforces Baseband ABW and throughput HWACs


for WCDMA and updates existing capacity-related alarms.

Table 20 Capacity Extensions


Capacity Expansion Package A Expansion Package B
WCDMA throughput 140/240 288/480
(CE)
WCDMA ABW (CC) 3 6

The amount of installed HWACs must be checked before the upgrade to avoid
any loss of capacity. An MOShell script is provided for manual use to assist the
pre-upgrade checks.

If the installed amount is insufficient for the HWACs common among the
configured RATs, a loss of capacity is possible in the following configurations:

206 218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08


Basic Features per Functional Area

— Mixed mode Baseband NR + LTE + WCDMA can provide 150 Mbps less
throughput on Baseband 6631 or 75 Mbps less on Baseband 6621 for NR
and LTE if the maximum capacity of Baseband is not reached after the
software upgrade.

— Mixed mode Baseband NR or LTE + WCDMA + GSM on Baseband 6631 and


Baseband 6621 can provide 225 Mbps less throughput for NR or LTE if the
maximum capacity of Baseband is not reached after the software upgrade.

— Single standard WCDMA ABW capacity can require several additional


HWACs.

— Any mixed mode Baseband including WCDMA can require several additional
HWACs for ABW.

LTE and NR in mixed mode Baseband configurations with WCDMA or GSM have
less capacity available after the upgrade, as WCDMA and GSM reserve HWACs
that are common among RATs.

If additional capacity is needed, a new LKF, including sufficient HWACs, needs to


be ordered and installed prior to the software upgrade.

The MO Configuration Exceeds Resources Enabled by the Key alarm is updated


with additional text for capacity shortage scenarios.

The CapacityUsage.hupInfo attribute is updated to show WCDMA HUP


installation and allocation information.

This improvement applies to the following Baseband units:


— Baseband 5212, Baseband 5216

— Baseband 6303, Baseband 6318

— Baseband 6620, Baseband 6630

— Baseband 6621, Baseband 6631

For more information of the HWACs and alarms, see Licenses and Hardware
Activation Codes in Ericsson Software Model and Manage Licenses and
Hardware Activation Codes.

218/1553-HSD 101 02/1 Uen GG | 2022-10-08 207

You might also like